1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2019-06-01.23} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 9% 10% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 11% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 12% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 13% License, or (at your option) any later version. 14% 15% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 16% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 17% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 18% General Public License for more details. 19% 20% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 21% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 22% 23% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 24% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 25% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 26% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 27% 28% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 29% reports; you can get the latest version from: 30% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 31% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 32% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 33% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 34% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 35% 36% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 37% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 38% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 39% 40% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 41% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 42% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 43% tex foo.texi 44% texindex foo.?? 45% tex foo.texi 46% tex foo.texi 47% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 48% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 49% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 50% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 51% 52% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 53% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 54% full Texinfo distribution. 55% 56% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 57 58 59\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 60 61% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 62% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 63% they might have appeared in the input file name. 64\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 65 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 66 67% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 68% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 69\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 70 71\chardef\other=12 72 73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 75\let\+ = \relax 76 77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 78\let\ptexb=\b 79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 80\let\ptexc=\c 81\let\ptexcomma=\, 82\let\ptexdot=\. 83\let\ptexdots=\dots 84\let\ptexend=\end 85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 86\let\ptexexclam=\! 87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 88\let\ptexgtr=> 89\let\ptexhat=^ 90\let\ptexi=\i 91\let\ptexindent=\indent 92\let\ptexinsert=\insert 93\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 94\let\ptexless=< 95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 97\let\ptexplus=+ 98\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 99\let\ptexrbrace=\} 100\let\ptexslash=\/ 101\let\ptexsp=\sp 102\let\ptexstar=\* 103\let\ptexsup=\sup 104\let\ptext=\t 105\let\ptextop=\top 106{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 107 108% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 109% starts a new line in the output. 110\newlinechar = `^^J 111 112% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 113% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 114% 115\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 116 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 117\else 118 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 119\fi 120 121% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 122\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 123\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 124\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 125\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 126\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 127\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 128\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 129\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 130\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 131\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 132\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 133\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 136\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 137\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 138\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 139\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 140\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 141\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 142% 143\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 155% 156\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 157\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 158\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 159\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 161 162% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 163\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 164 165% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 166\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 167 168\chardef\dashChar = `\- 169\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 170\chardef\underChar = `\_ 171 172% Ignore a token. 173% 174\def\gobble#1{} 175 176% The following is used inside several \edef's. 177\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 178 179% Hyphenation fixes. 180\hyphenation{ 181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 186 spell-ing spell-ings 187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 188 wide-spread wrap-around 189} 190 191% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 192% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 193% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 194% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 195% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 196% 197\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 198\def\loggingall{% 199 \tracingstats2 200 \tracingpages1 201 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 202 \tracingparagraphs1 203 \tracingoutput1 204 \tracingmacros2 205 \tracingrestores1 206 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 207 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 208 \tracingscantokens1 209 \tracingifs1 210 \tracinggroups1 211 \tracingnesting2 212 \tracingassigns1 213 \fi 214 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 215 \errorcontextlines16 216}% 217 218% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 219% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 220% after all. 221% 222\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 223\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 224 225% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 226% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 227% 228\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 229 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 230\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 231 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 232\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 233 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 234 235% Output routine 236% 237 238% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 239% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 240% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 241% 242\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 243 244\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 245\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 246 247% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 248% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 249% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 250% 251% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 252% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 253% 254% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 255% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 256% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 257 258% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 259% mark before the section break, and one after. 260% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs, 261% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs. 262% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 263% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 264% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 265% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 266% 267% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 268\def\domark{% 269 \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}% 270 \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}% 271 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 272 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 273 \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}% 274 \mark{% 275 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 276 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 277 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 278 }% 279} 280 281% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 282% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 283% 284% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 285% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 286% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 287% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 288% first @chapter. 289\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 290 \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi 291 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 292} 293\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 294\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi} 295 296% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 297\def\currentchapterdefs{} 298\def\currentsectiondefs{} 299\def\currentsection{} 300\def\prevchapterdefs{} 301\def\prevsectiondefs{} 302\def\currentcolordefs{} 303 304% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 305\newdimen\bindingoffset 306\newdimen\normaloffset 307\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 308 309% Main output routine. 310% 311\chardef\PAGE = 255 312\newtoks\defaultoutput 313\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 314\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 315 316\newbox\headlinebox 317\newbox\footlinebox 318 319% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine 320% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This 321% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading 322% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of 323% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually 324% \shipout a page. 325% 326% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and 327% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page 328% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown 329% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.) 330% 331\newtoks\savedtopmark 332\newif\iftopmarksaved 333\topmarksavedtrue 334\def\savetopmark{% 335 \iftopmarksaved\else 336 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}% 337 \global\topmarksavedtrue 338 \fi 339} 340 341% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 342% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer 343% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written 344% to the auxiliary files. 345% 346\def\onepageout#1{% 347 \hoffset=\normaloffset 348 % 349 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 350 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 351 % 352 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 353 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 354 % values in \headline and \footline. 355 % 356 % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter. 357 \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi 358 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 359 \ifcase0\firstmark\fi 360 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 361 % 362 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 363 % 364 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 365 \let\thischapterheading\thischapter 366 \else 367 % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank 368 % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name 369 % being shown twice. 370 \def\thischapterheading{}% 371 \fi 372 % 373 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 374 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 375 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 376 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 377 % 378 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 379 % 380 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 381 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% 382 % 383 {% 384 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 385 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 386 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 387 % before the \shipout runs. 388 % 389 \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 390 \turnoffactive 391 \shipout\vbox{% 392 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 393 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 394 % 395 \unvbox\headlinebox 396 \pagebody{#1}% 397 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 398 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 399 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 400 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 401 \vskip 24pt 402 \unvbox\footlinebox 403 \fi 404 % 405 }% 406 }% 407 \global\topmarksavedfalse 408 \advancepageno 409 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 410} 411 412\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 413 414% Main part of page, including any footnotes 415\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 416{\catcode`\@ =11 417\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 418% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 419\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 420 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 421\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 422\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 423\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 424} 425 426 427% Argument parsing 428 429% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 430% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 431% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 432% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 433% 434\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 435\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 436 \def\argtorun{#2}% 437 \begingroup 438 \obeylines 439 \spaceisspace 440 #1% 441 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 442} 443 444{\obeylines % 445 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 446 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 447 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 448 }% 449} 450 451% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to 452% \argcheckspaces. 453\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 454\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 455 456% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 457% 458% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 459% @end itemize @c foo 460% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 461% by \finishparsearg. 462% 463\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 464\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 465\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 466 \def\temp{#3}% 467 \ifx\temp\empty 468 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 469 \let\temp\finishparsearg 470 \else 471 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 472 \fi 473 % Put the space token in: 474 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 475} 476 477% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 478% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 479% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 480% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 481% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 482% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 483% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 484% 485% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 486% 487\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 488 489 490% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 491% 492% \parseargdef\foo{...} 493% is roughly equivalent to 494% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 495% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 496\def\parseargdef#1{% 497 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 498} 499\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 500 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 501 \def#1##1% 502} 503 504% Several utility definitions with active space: 505{ 506 \obeyspaces 507 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 508 509 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 510 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 511 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 512 % should produce a line of output anyway. 513 % 514 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 515 516 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 517 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 518 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 519 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 520} 521 522 523\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 524 525% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 526% 527% \envdef\foo{...} 528% \def\Efoo{...} 529% 530% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 531% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 532% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 533% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 534% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 535% 536% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 537% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 538% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 539% special case.) 540 541 542% At run-time, environments start with this: 543\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 544% initialize 545\let\thisenv\empty 546 547% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 548\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 549\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 550 551% Check whether we're in the right environment: 552\def\checkenv#1{% 553 \def\temp{#1}% 554 \ifx\thisenv\temp 555 \else 556 \badenverr 557 \fi 558} 559 560% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 561\def\badenverr{% 562 \errhelp = \EMsimple 563 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 564 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 565} 566\def\inenvironment#1{% 567 \ifx#1\empty 568 outside of any environment% 569 \else 570 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 571 \fi 572} 573 574% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 575% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 576% 577\parseargdef\end{% 578 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 579 \else 580 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 581 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 582 \csname E#1\endcsname 583 \endgroup 584 \fi 585} 586 587\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 588 589 590% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 591% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 592% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 593% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 594% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 595{\catcode`@ = 11 596 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 597 % if the definition is written into an index file. 598 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 599 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 600} 601 602% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 603\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 604 605% @* forces a line break. 606\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 607 608% @/ allows a line break. 609\let\/=\allowbreak 610 611% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 612\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 613 614% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 615\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 616 617% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 618\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 619 620% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 621% 622\def\onword{on} 623\def\offword{off} 624% 625\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 626 \def\temp{#1}% 627 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 628 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 629 \else 630 \errhelp = \EMsimple 631 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 632 \fi\fi 633} 634 635% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 636% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 637% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 638\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 639 640% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 641% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 642% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 643% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 644% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 645% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 646% the text is small, which looks bad. 647% 648% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 649% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 650% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 651% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 652% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 653% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 654% 655\newbox\groupbox 656\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 657% 658\envdef\group{% 659 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 660 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 661 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 662 \fi 663 \startsavinginserts 664 % 665 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 666 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 667 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 668 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 669 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 670 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 671 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 672 \comment 673} 674% 675% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 676% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 677% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 678% above. But it's pretty close. 679\def\Egroup{% 680 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 681 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 682 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 683 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 684 \egroup % End the \vtop. 685 \addgroupbox 686 \prevdepth = \dimen1 687 \checkinserts 688} 689 690\def\addgroupbox{ 691 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 692 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 693 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 694 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 695 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 696 % group, force a page break. 697 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 698 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 699 \page 700 \fi 701 \fi 702 \box\groupbox 703} 704 705% 706% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 707% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 708% 709\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 710group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 711where each line of input produces a line of output.} 712 713% @need space-in-mils 714% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 715 716\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 717 718\parseargdef\need{% 719 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 720 % paragraph. 721 \par 722 % 723 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 724 \dimen0 = #1\mil 725 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 726 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 727 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 728 % 729 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 730 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 731 % And a page break here is fine. 732 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 733 % 734 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 735 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 736 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 737 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 738 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 739 % 740 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 741 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 742 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 743 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 744 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 745 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 746 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 747 \penalty9999 748 % 749 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 750 \kern -#1\mil 751 % 752 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 753 \nobreak 754 \fi 755} 756 757% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 758 759\let\br = \par 760 761% @page forces the start of a new page. 762% 763\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 764 765% @exdent text.... 766% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 767 768% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 769% That's how much \exdent should take out. 770\newskip\exdentamount 771 772% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 773\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 774 775% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 776\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 777 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 778 779% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 780% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 781% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 782% 783\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 784\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 785% 786\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 787 \nobreak 788 \kern-\strutdepth 789 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 790 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 791 \vss 792 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 793 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 794 \ifx#1l% 795 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 796 \else 797 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 798 \fi 799 \null 800 }% 801}} 802\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 803\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 804% 805% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 806% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 807% else use TEXT for both). 808% 809\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 810\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 811 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 812 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 813 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 814 \def\righttext{#2}% 815 \else 816 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 817 \def\righttext{#1}% 818 \fi 819 % 820 \ifodd\pageno 821 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 822 \else 823 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 824 \fi 825 \temp 826} 827 828% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 829% 830\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 831\def\includezzz#1{% 832 \pushthisfilestack 833 \def\thisfile{#1}% 834 {% 835 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 836 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 837 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 838 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 839 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 840 % 841 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 842 % definitions, etc. 843 \expandafter 844 }\temp 845 \popthisfilestack 846} 847\def\filenamecatcodes{% 848 \catcode`\\=\other 849 \catcode`~=\other 850 \catcode`^=\other 851 \catcode`_=\other 852 \catcode`|=\other 853 \catcode`<=\other 854 \catcode`>=\other 855 \catcode`+=\other 856 \catcode`-=\other 857 \catcode`\`=\other 858 \catcode`\'=\other 859} 860 861\def\pushthisfilestack{% 862 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 863} 864\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 865 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 866} 867\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 868 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 869} 870 871\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 872\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 873 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 874% 875\def\thisfile{} 876 877% @center line 878% outputs that line, centered. 879% 880\parseargdef\center{% 881 \ifhmode 882 \let\centersub\centerH 883 \else 884 \let\centersub\centerV 885 \fi 886 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 887 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 888} 889\def\centerH#1{{% 890 \hfil\break 891 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 892 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 893 \line{#1}% 894 \break 895}} 896% 897\newcount\centerpenalty 898\def\centerV#1{% 899 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 900 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 901 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 902 % prevent a page break here. 903 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 904 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 905 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 906 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 907} 908 909% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 910% 911\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 912 913% @comment ...line which is ignored... 914% @c is the same as @comment 915% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 916 917 918\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 919\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 920\cxxx} 921{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 922% 923\let\comment\c 924 925% @paragraphindent NCHARS 926% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 927% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 928% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 929% 930\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 931\def\noneword{none} 932% 933\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 934 \def\temp{#1}% 935 \ifx\temp\asisword 936 \else 937 \ifx\temp\noneword 938 \defaultparindent = 0pt 939 \else 940 \defaultparindent = #1em 941 \fi 942 \fi 943 \parindent = \defaultparindent 944} 945 946% @exampleindent NCHARS 947% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 948% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 949% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 950\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 951 \def\temp{#1}% 952 \ifx\temp\asisword 953 \else 954 \ifx\temp\noneword 955 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 956 \else 957 \lispnarrowing = #1em 958 \fi 959 \fi 960} 961 962% @firstparagraphindent WORD 963% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 964% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 965% paragraphs. 966% 967% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 968% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 969% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 970% By default, we suppress indentation. 971% 972\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 973\def\insertword{insert} 974% 975\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 976 \def\temp{#1}% 977 \ifx\temp\noneword 978 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 979 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 980 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 981 \else 982 \errhelp = \EMsimple 983 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 984 \fi\fi 985} 986 987% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 988% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 989% 990% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 991% paragraph. 992% 993\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 994 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 995 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 996 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 997} 998% 999\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1000 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1001 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1002 \global\everypar = {}% 1003} 1004 1005 1006% @refill is a no-op. 1007\let\refill=\relax 1008 1009% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1010\let\setfilename=\comment 1011 1012% @bye. 1013\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1014 1015 1016\message{pdf,} 1017% adobe `portable' document format 1018\newcount\tempnum 1019\newcount\lnkcount 1020\newtoks\filename 1021\newcount\filenamelength 1022\newcount\pgn 1023\newtoks\toksA 1024\newtoks\toksB 1025\newtoks\toksC 1026\newtoks\toksD 1027\newbox\boxA 1028\newbox\boxB 1029\newcount\countA 1030\newif\ifpdf 1031\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1032 1033% 1034% For LuaTeX 1035% 1036 1037\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1038\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1039 1040\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1041\else 1042 % Use Unicode destination names 1043 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1044 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1045 \begingroup 1046 \catcode`\%=12 1047 \directlua{ 1048 function UTF16oct(str) 1049 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1050 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1051 if c < 0x10000 then 1052 tex.sprint( 1053 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1054 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1055 (c / 256), (c % 256))) 1056 else 1057 c = c - 0x10000 1058 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1059 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1060 tex.sprint( 1061 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1062 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1063 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1064 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1065 (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256), 1066 (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256))) 1067 end 1068 end 1069 end 1070 } 1071 \endgroup 1072 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1073 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1074 \begingroup 1075 \directlua{ 1076 function PDFescstr(str) 1077 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1078 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1079 tex.sprint( 1080 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1081 c)) 1082 else 1083 tex.sprint(string.char(c)) 1084 end 1085 end 1086 end 1087 } 1088 \endgroup 1089 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1090 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1091 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1092 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1093 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1094 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1095 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1096 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1097 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1098 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1099 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1100 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1101 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1102 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1103 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1104 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1105 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1106 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1107 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1108 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1109 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1110 \fi 1111\fi 1112 1113% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1114% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1115\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1116\else 1117 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1118 \else 1119 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1120 \else 1121 \pdftrue 1122 \fi 1123 \fi 1124\fi 1125 1126\newif\ifpdforxetex 1127\pdforxetexfalse 1128\ifpdf 1129 \pdforxetextrue 1130\fi 1131\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else 1132 \pdforxetextrue 1133\fi 1134 1135 1136% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1137% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1138% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1139% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1140% 1141% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1142% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1143% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1144% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1145% do this reliably, so we use it. 1146 1147% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1148% which we \xdef. 1149\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1150 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1151 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1152 % Many times it won't matter. 1153 \xdef#1{#1}% 1154 \else 1155 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1156 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1157 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1158 \fi 1159} 1160\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1161 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1162 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1163 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1164 \else 1165 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1166 \fi 1167} 1168 1169\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1170with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1171be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1172output) for that.)} 1173 1174\ifpdf 1175 % 1176 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1177 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1178 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1179 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1180 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1181 % black by default, though. 1182 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1183 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1184 % 1185 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1186 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1187 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1188 % 1189 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1190 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1191 \def\setcolor#1{% 1192 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1193 \domark 1194 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1195 } 1196 % 1197 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1198 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1199 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1200 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1201 % 1202 \def\makefootline{% 1203 \baselineskip24pt 1204 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1205 } 1206 % 1207 \def\makeheadline{% 1208 \vbox to 0pt{% 1209 \vskip-22.5pt 1210 \line{% 1211 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1212 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1213 \getcolormarks 1214 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1215 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1216 }% 1217 \vss 1218 }% 1219 \nointerlineskip 1220 } 1221 % 1222 % 1223 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1224 % 1225 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1226 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1227 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1228 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1229 % 1230 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1231 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1232 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1233 % bitmap. 1234 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1235 \begingroup 1236 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1237 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1238 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1239 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1240 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1241 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1242 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1243 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1244 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1245 \fi 1246 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1247 \fi 1248 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1249 \fi 1250 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1251 \fi 1252 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1253 \fi 1254 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1255 \fi 1256 \closein 1 1257 \endgroup 1258 % 1259 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1260 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1261 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1262 \immediate\pdfimage 1263 \else 1264 \immediate\pdfximage 1265 \fi 1266 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1267 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1268 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1269 #1.\pdfimgext 1270 \else 1271 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1272 \fi 1273 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1274 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1275 \fi} 1276 % 1277 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1278 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1279 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1280 \indexnofonts 1281 \makevalueexpandable 1282 \turnoffactive 1283 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1284 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1285 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1286 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1287 \else 1288 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1289 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1290 \else 1291 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1292 \passthroughcharsfalse 1293 \fi 1294 \fi 1295 \else 1296 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1297 \passthroughcharsfalse 1298 \fi 1299 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1300 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1301 }} 1302 % 1303 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1304 \indexnofonts 1305 \makevalueexpandable 1306 \turnoffactive 1307 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1308 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1309 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1310 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1311 \passthroughcharstrue 1312 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1313 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1314 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1315 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1316 \else 1317 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1318 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1319 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1320 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1321 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1322 % Use ASCII approximations. 1323 \passthroughcharsfalse 1324 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1325 \else 1326 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1327 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1328 \passthroughcharstrue 1329 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1330 \fi 1331 \else 1332 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1333 % Use ASCII approximations. 1334 \passthroughcharsfalse 1335 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1336 \fi 1337 \fi 1338 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1339 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1340 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1341 }} 1342 % 1343 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1344 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1345 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1346 } 1347 % 1348 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1349 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1350 % 1351 % by default, use black for everything. 1352 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1353 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1354 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1355 % 1356 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1357 % come from Petr Olsak 1358 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1359 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1360 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1361 \advance\tempnum by 1 1362 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1363 % 1364 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1365 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1366 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1367 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1368 % #4 is the page number 1369 % 1370 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1371 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1372 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1373 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1374 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1375 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1376 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1377 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1378 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1379 \fi 1380 % 1381 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1382 } 1383 % 1384 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1385 \begingroup 1386 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1387 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1388 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1389 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1390 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1391 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1392 }% 1393 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1394 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1395 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1396 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1397 }% 1398 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1399 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1400 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1401 }% 1402 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1403 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1404 }% 1405 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1406 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1407 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1408 % 1409 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1410 % al. a second time, below. 1411 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1412 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1413 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1414 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1415 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1416 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1417 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1418 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1419 \readdatafile{toc}% 1420 % 1421 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1422 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1423 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1424 % 1425 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1426 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1427 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1428 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1429 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1430 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1431 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1432 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1433 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1434 % 1435 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1436 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1437 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1438 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1439 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1440 % 1441 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1442 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1443 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1444 % we use for the index sort strings. 1445 % 1446 \indexnofonts 1447 \setupdatafile 1448 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1449 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1450 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1451 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1452 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1453 \input \tocreadfilename 1454 \endgroup 1455 } 1456 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1457 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1458 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1459 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1460 ] 1461 % 1462 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1463 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1464 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1465 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1466 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1467 \fi 1468 \nextsp} 1469 \def\getfilename#1{% 1470 \filenamelength=0 1471 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1472 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1473 \edef\temp{#1}% 1474 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1475 } 1476 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1477 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1478 \else 1479 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1480 \fi 1481 % make a live url in pdf output. 1482 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1483 \begingroup 1484 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1485 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1486 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1487 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1488 % 1489 \normalturnoffactive 1490 \def\@{@}% 1491 \let\/=\empty 1492 \makevalueexpandable 1493 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1494 % special-casing \var here? 1495 \def\var##1{##1}% 1496 % 1497 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1498 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1499 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1500 \endgroup} 1501 % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may 1502 % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index 1503 % entry. 1504 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1505 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1506 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1507 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1508 \def\maketoks{% 1509 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1510 \ifx\first0\adn0 1511 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1512 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1513 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1514 \else 1515 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1516 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1517 \let\next=\maketoks 1518 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1519 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1520 \fi 1521 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1522 \next} 1523 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1524 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1525 \def\pdflink#1{% 1526 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1527 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1528 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1529\else 1530 % non-pdf mode 1531 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1532 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1533 \let\endlink = \relax 1534 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1535 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1536 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1537\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1538 1539% 1540% For XeTeX 1541% 1542\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1543\else 1544 % 1545 % XeTeX version check 1546 % 1547 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1548 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1549 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1550 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1551 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1552 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1553 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1554 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1555 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1556 \else 1557 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1558 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1559 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1560 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1561 % 1562 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1563 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1564 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1565 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1566 \fi 1567 % 1568 % Color support 1569 % 1570 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1571 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1572 % 1573 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1574 % 1575 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1576 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1577 \def\setcolor#1{% 1578 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1579 \domark 1580 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1581 } 1582 % 1583 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1584 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1585 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1586 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1587 % 1588 \def\makefootline{% 1589 \baselineskip24pt 1590 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1591 } 1592 % 1593 \def\makeheadline{% 1594 \vbox to 0pt{% 1595 \vskip-22.5pt 1596 \line{% 1597 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1598 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1599 \getcolormarks 1600 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1601 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1602 }% 1603 \vss 1604 }% 1605 \nointerlineskip 1606 } 1607 % 1608 % PDF outline support 1609 % 1610 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1611 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1612 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1613 } 1614 % 1615 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1616 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1617 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1618 \indexnofonts 1619 \makevalueexpandable 1620 \turnoffactive 1621 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1622 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1623 \else 1624 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1625 \passthroughcharsfalse 1626 \fi 1627 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1628 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1629 }} 1630 % 1631 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1632 \turnoffactive 1633 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1634 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1635 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1636 % So we do not convert. 1637 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1638 }} 1639 % 1640 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1641 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1642 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1643 } 1644 % 1645 % by default, use black for everything. 1646 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1647 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1648 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1649 % 1650 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1651 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1652 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1653 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1654 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1655 \fi 1656 % 1657 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1658 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1659 } 1660 % 1661 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1662 \begingroup 1663 % 1664 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1665 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1666 % 1667 % We use node names as destinations. 1668 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1669 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1670 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1671 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1672 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1673 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1674 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1675 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1676 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1677 % 1678 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1679 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1680 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1681 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1682 \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry% 1683 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1684 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1685 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1686 % 1687 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1688 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1689 % 1690 \indexnofonts 1691 \setupdatafile 1692 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1693 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1694 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1695 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1696 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1697 \input \tocreadfilename 1698 \endgroup 1699 } 1700 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1701 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1702 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1703 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1704 ] 1705 1706 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1707 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1708 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1709 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1710 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1711 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1712% 1713 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1714 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1715 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1716 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1717 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1718 \fi 1719 \nextsp} 1720 \def\getfilename#1{% 1721 \filenamelength=0 1722 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1723 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1724 \edef\temp{#1}% 1725 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1726 } 1727 % make a live url in pdf output. 1728 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1729 \begingroup 1730 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1731 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1732 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1733 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1734 % 1735 \normalturnoffactive 1736 \def\@{@}% 1737 \let\/=\empty 1738 \makevalueexpandable 1739 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1740 % special-casing \var here? 1741 \def\var##1{##1}% 1742 % 1743 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1744 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1745 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1746 \endgroup} 1747 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1748 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1749 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1750 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1751 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1752 \def\maketoks{% 1753 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1754 \ifx\first0\adn0 1755 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1756 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1757 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1758 \else 1759 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1760 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1761 \let\next=\maketoks 1762 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1763 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1764 \fi 1765 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1766 \next} 1767 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1768 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1769 \def\pdflink#1{% 1770 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1771 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1772 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1773 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1774% 1775 % 1776 % @image support 1777 % 1778 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1779 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1780 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1781 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1782 % 1783 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1784 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1785 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1786 % bitmap. 1787 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1788 \begingroup 1789 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1790 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1791 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1792 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1793 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1794 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1795 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1796 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1797 \fi 1798 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1799 \fi 1800 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1801 \fi 1802 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1803 \fi 1804 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1805 \fi 1806 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1807 \fi 1808 \closein 1 1809 \endgroup 1810 % 1811 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1812 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1813 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1814 \else 1815 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1816 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1817 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1818 \else 1819 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1820 \fi 1821 \fi 1822 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1823 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1824 } 1825\fi 1826 1827 1828% 1829\message{fonts,} 1830 1831% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1832% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1833% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1834% 1835\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1836\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1837\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1838% 1839% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1840\def\baselinefactor{1} 1841% 1842\newdimen\textleading 1843\def\setleading#1{% 1844 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1845 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1846 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1847 \normalbaselines 1848 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1849 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1850 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1851 }% 1852} 1853 1854% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1855% 1856% do nothing with this by default. 1857\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1858\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1859\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1860 1861% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1862% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1863% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1864\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1865 \begingroup 1866 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1867 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1868%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1869%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1870%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1871%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1872%%Version: 1.000 1873%%EndComments 1874/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 187512 dict begin 1876begincmap 1877/CIDSystemInfo 1878<< /Registry (TeX) 1879/Ordering (OT1) 1880/Supplement 0 1881>> def 1882/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1883/CMapType 2 def 18841 begincodespacerange 1885<00> <7F> 1886endcodespacerange 18878 beginbfrange 1888<00> <01> <0393> 1889<09> <0A> <03A8> 1890<23> <26> <0023> 1891<28> <3B> <0028> 1892<3F> <5B> <003F> 1893<5D> <5E> <005D> 1894<61> <7A> <0061> 1895<7B> <7C> <2013> 1896endbfrange 189740 beginbfchar 1898<02> <0398> 1899<03> <039B> 1900<04> <039E> 1901<05> <03A0> 1902<06> <03A3> 1903<07> <03D2> 1904<08> <03A6> 1905<0B> <00660066> 1906<0C> <00660069> 1907<0D> <0066006C> 1908<0E> <006600660069> 1909<0F> <00660066006C> 1910<10> <0131> 1911<11> <0237> 1912<12> <0060> 1913<13> <00B4> 1914<14> <02C7> 1915<15> <02D8> 1916<16> <00AF> 1917<17> <02DA> 1918<18> <00B8> 1919<19> <00DF> 1920<1A> <00E6> 1921<1B> <0153> 1922<1C> <00F8> 1923<1D> <00C6> 1924<1E> <0152> 1925<1F> <00D8> 1926<21> <0021> 1927<22> <201D> 1928<27> <2019> 1929<3C> <00A1> 1930<3D> <003D> 1931<3E> <00BF> 1932<5C> <201C> 1933<5F> <02D9> 1934<60> <2018> 1935<7D> <02DD> 1936<7E> <007E> 1937<7F> <00A8> 1938endbfchar 1939endcmap 1940CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1941end 1942end 1943%%EndResource 1944%%EOF 1945 }\endgroup 1946 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1947 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1948 }% 1949% 1950% \cmapOT1IT 1951 \begingroup 1952 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1953 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1954%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1955%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1956%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1957%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1958%%Version: 1.000 1959%%EndComments 1960/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 196112 dict begin 1962begincmap 1963/CIDSystemInfo 1964<< /Registry (TeX) 1965/Ordering (OT1IT) 1966/Supplement 0 1967>> def 1968/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1969/CMapType 2 def 19701 begincodespacerange 1971<00> <7F> 1972endcodespacerange 19738 beginbfrange 1974<00> <01> <0393> 1975<09> <0A> <03A8> 1976<25> <26> <0025> 1977<28> <3B> <0028> 1978<3F> <5B> <003F> 1979<5D> <5E> <005D> 1980<61> <7A> <0061> 1981<7B> <7C> <2013> 1982endbfrange 198342 beginbfchar 1984<02> <0398> 1985<03> <039B> 1986<04> <039E> 1987<05> <03A0> 1988<06> <03A3> 1989<07> <03D2> 1990<08> <03A6> 1991<0B> <00660066> 1992<0C> <00660069> 1993<0D> <0066006C> 1994<0E> <006600660069> 1995<0F> <00660066006C> 1996<10> <0131> 1997<11> <0237> 1998<12> <0060> 1999<13> <00B4> 2000<14> <02C7> 2001<15> <02D8> 2002<16> <00AF> 2003<17> <02DA> 2004<18> <00B8> 2005<19> <00DF> 2006<1A> <00E6> 2007<1B> <0153> 2008<1C> <00F8> 2009<1D> <00C6> 2010<1E> <0152> 2011<1F> <00D8> 2012<21> <0021> 2013<22> <201D> 2014<23> <0023> 2015<24> <00A3> 2016<27> <2019> 2017<3C> <00A1> 2018<3D> <003D> 2019<3E> <00BF> 2020<5C> <201C> 2021<5F> <02D9> 2022<60> <2018> 2023<7D> <02DD> 2024<7E> <007E> 2025<7F> <00A8> 2026endbfchar 2027endcmap 2028CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2029end 2030end 2031%%EndResource 2032%%EOF 2033 }\endgroup 2034 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2035 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2036 }% 2037% 2038% \cmapOT1TT 2039 \begingroup 2040 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2041 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2042%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2043%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2044%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2045%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2046%%Version: 1.000 2047%%EndComments 2048/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 204912 dict begin 2050begincmap 2051/CIDSystemInfo 2052<< /Registry (TeX) 2053/Ordering (OT1TT) 2054/Supplement 0 2055>> def 2056/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2057/CMapType 2 def 20581 begincodespacerange 2059<00> <7F> 2060endcodespacerange 20615 beginbfrange 2062<00> <01> <0393> 2063<09> <0A> <03A8> 2064<21> <26> <0021> 2065<28> <5F> <0028> 2066<61> <7E> <0061> 2067endbfrange 206832 beginbfchar 2069<02> <0398> 2070<03> <039B> 2071<04> <039E> 2072<05> <03A0> 2073<06> <03A3> 2074<07> <03D2> 2075<08> <03A6> 2076<0B> <2191> 2077<0C> <2193> 2078<0D> <0027> 2079<0E> <00A1> 2080<0F> <00BF> 2081<10> <0131> 2082<11> <0237> 2083<12> <0060> 2084<13> <00B4> 2085<14> <02C7> 2086<15> <02D8> 2087<16> <00AF> 2088<17> <02DA> 2089<18> <00B8> 2090<19> <00DF> 2091<1A> <00E6> 2092<1B> <0153> 2093<1C> <00F8> 2094<1D> <00C6> 2095<1E> <0152> 2096<1F> <00D8> 2097<20> <2423> 2098<27> <2019> 2099<60> <2018> 2100<7F> <00A8> 2101endbfchar 2102endcmap 2103CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2104end 2105end 2106%%EndResource 2107%%EOF 2108 }\endgroup 2109 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2110 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2111 }% 2112\fi\fi 2113 2114 2115% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2116% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2117% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2118% Example: 2119% #1 = \textrm 2120% #2 = \rmshape 2121% #3 = 10 2122% #4 = \mainmagstep 2123% #5 = OT1 2124% 2125\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2126 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2127 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2128} 2129% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2130\let\cmap\gobble 2131% 2132% (end of cmaps) 2133 2134% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2135% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2136% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2137\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2138\def\fontprefix{cm} 2139\fi 2140% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2141\def\rmshape{r} 2142\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2143\def\bfshape{b} 2144\def\bxshape{bx} 2145\def\ttshape{tt} 2146\def\ttbshape{tt} 2147\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2148\def\itshape{ti} 2149\def\itbshape{bxti} 2150\def\slshape{sl} 2151\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2152\def\sfshape{ss} 2153\def\sfbshape{ss} 2154\def\scshape{csc} 2155\def\scbshape{csc} 2156 2157% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2158% 2159\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2160% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2161\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2162\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2163\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2164\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2165\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2166\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2167\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2168\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2169\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2170\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2171\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2172\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2173\def\textecsize{1095} 2174 2175% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2176\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2177\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2178\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2179\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2180\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2181\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2182 2183% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2184\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2185\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2186\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2187\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2188\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2189\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2190\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2191\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2192\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2193\font\smalli=cmmi9 2194\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2195\def\smallecsize{0900} 2196 2197% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2198\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2199\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2200\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2201\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2202\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2203\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2204\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2205\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2206\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2207\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2208\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2209\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2210 2211% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2212\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2213\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2214\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2215\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2216\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2217\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2218\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2219\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2220\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2221\font\seveni=cmmi7 2222\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2223\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2224 2225% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2226\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2227\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2228\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2229\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2230\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2231\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2232\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2233\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2234\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2235\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2236\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2237\def\titleecsize{2074} 2238 2239% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2240\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2241\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2242\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2243\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2244\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2245\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2246\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2247\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2248\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2249\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2250\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2251\def\chapecsize{1728} 2252 2253% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2254\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2255\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2256\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2257\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2258\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2259\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2260\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2261\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2262\let\secbf\secrm 2263\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2264\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2265\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2266\def\sececsize{1440} 2267 2268% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2269\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2270\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2271\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2272\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2273\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2274\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2275\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2276\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2277\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2278\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2279\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2280\def\ssececsize{1200} 2281 2282% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2283\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2284\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2285\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2286\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2287\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2288\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2289\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2290\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2291\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2292\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2293\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2294\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2295 2296\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2297\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2298\rm 2299} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2300 2301 2302% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2303% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2304% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2305% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2306% 2307\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2308% Text fonts (10pt). 2309\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2310\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2311\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2312\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2313\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2314\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2315\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2316\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2317\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2318\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2319\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2320\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2321\def\textecsize{1000} 2322 2323% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2324\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2325\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2326\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2327\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2328\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2329\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2330 2331% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2332\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2333\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2334\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2335\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2336\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2337\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2338\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2339\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2340\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2341\font\smalli=cmmi9 2342\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2343\def\smallecsize{0900} 2344 2345% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2346\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2347\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2348\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2349\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2350\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2351\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2352\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2353\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2354\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2355\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2356\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2357\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2358 2359% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2360\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2361\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2362\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2363\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2364\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2365\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2366\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2367\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2368\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2369\font\seveni=cmmi7 2370\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2371\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2372 2373% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2374\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2375\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2376\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2377\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2378\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2379\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2380\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2381\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2382\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2383\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2384\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2385\def\titleecsize{2074} 2386 2387% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2388\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2389\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2390\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2391\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2392\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2393\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2394\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2395\let\chapbf\chaprm 2396\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2397\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2398\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2399\def\chapecsize{1440} 2400 2401% Section fonts (12pt). 2402\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2403\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2404\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2405\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2406\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2407\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2408\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2409\let\secbf\secrm 2410\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2411\font\seci=cmmi12 2412\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2413\def\sececsize{1200} 2414 2415% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2416\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2417\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2418\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2419\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2420\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2421\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2422\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2423\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2424\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2425\font\sseci=cmmi10 2426\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2427\def\ssececsize{1000} 2428 2429% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2430\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2431\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2432\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2433\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2434\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2435\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2436\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2437\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2438\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2439\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2440\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2441\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2442 2443\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2444\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2445\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2446\rm 2447} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2448 2449% Fonts for short table of contents. 2450\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2451\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2452\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2453\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2454 2455 2456% We provide the user-level command 2457% @fonttextsize 10 2458% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2459% 2460\def\xiword{11} 2461\def\xword{10} 2462\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2463% 2464\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2465 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2466 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2467 % 2468 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2469 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2470 % 2471 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2472 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2473 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2474 \else 2475 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2476 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2477 \fi\fi 2478 \endgroup 2479} 2480 2481% 2482% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2483% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2484% italics, not bold italics. 2485% 2486\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2487 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2488 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2489} 2490 2491\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2492\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2493\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2494\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2495\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 2496 2497% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2498% So we set up a \sf. 2499\newfam\sffam 2500\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2501 2502% We don't need math for this font style. 2503\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2504 2505 2506% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2507% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2508% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2509% 2510\def\resetmathfonts{% 2511 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2512 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2513 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2514 % 2515 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2516 % of the current font size. 2517 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2518 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2519 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2520 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2521} 2522 2523% 2524 2525% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2526% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2527% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2528% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2529% 2530% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2531% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2532% 2533% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2534% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2535% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2536% 2537% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2538% 2539 2540\def\assignfonts#1{% 2541 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2542 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2543 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2544 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2545 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2546 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2547 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2548 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2549 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2550 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2551} 2552 2553\newif\ifrmisbold 2554 2555% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2556% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2557% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2558\def\switchtolllsize{% 2559 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2560 \ifrmisbold 2561 \let\rmfont\bffont 2562 \fi 2563 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2564}% 2565 2566\def\switchtolsize{% 2567 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2568 \ifrmisbold 2569 \let\rmfont\bffont 2570 \fi 2571 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2572}% 2573 2574\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2575\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2576 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2577 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2578 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2579 \assignfonts{#1}% 2580 \resetmathfonts 2581 \setleading{#4}% 2582}} 2583 2584\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2585\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2586\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2587\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2588\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2589\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2590\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2591\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2592 2593\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2594\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2595\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2596 2597% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2598\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2599\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2600 2601% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2602\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2603 2604% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2605% can fit this many characters: 2606% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2607% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2608% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2609% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2610% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2611% 2612% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2613% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2614% --karl, 24jan03. 2615 2616% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2617% 2618\definetextfontsizexi 2619 2620 2621\message{markup,} 2622 2623% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2624% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2625% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2626% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2627% 2628\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2629 2630% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2631% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2632% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2633% style. 2634 2635\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2636 2637\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2638 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2639 \markupstylesetup 2640} 2641 2642\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2643 2644\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2645 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2646 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2647 \def#1% 2648} 2649 2650% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2651\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2652 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2653 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2654 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2655} 2656 2657\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2658 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2659 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2660 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2661} 2662 2663{ 2664\catcode`\'=\active 2665\catcode`\`=\active 2666 2667\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2668\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2669 2670\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2671\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2672} 2673 2674\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2675\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2676% 2677\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2678\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2679% 2680\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2681\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2682% 2683\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2684\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2685% 2686\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2687\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2688% 2689\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2690\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2691 2692% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2693% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2694% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2695% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2696% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2697% 2698\def\codequoteright{% 2699 \ifmonospace 2700 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2701 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2702 '% 2703 \else \char'15 \fi 2704 \else \char'15 \fi 2705 \else 2706 '% 2707 \fi 2708} 2709% 2710% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2711% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2712% the code environments to do likewise. 2713% 2714\def\codequoteleft{% 2715 \ifmonospace 2716 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2717 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2718 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2719 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2720 \relax`% 2721 \else \char'22 \fi 2722 \else \char'22 \fi 2723 \else 2724 \relax`% 2725 \fi 2726} 2727 2728% Commands to set the quote options. 2729% 2730\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2731 \def\temp{#1}% 2732 \ifx\temp\onword 2733 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2734 = t% 2735 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2736 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2737 = \relax 2738 \else 2739 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2740 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2741 \fi\fi 2742} 2743% 2744\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2745 \def\temp{#1}% 2746 \ifx\temp\onword 2747 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2748 = t% 2749 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2750 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2751 = \relax 2752 \else 2753 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2754 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2755 \fi\fi 2756} 2757 2758% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2759\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2760 2761% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2762\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2763 2764% Font commands. 2765 2766% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2767% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2768% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2769\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2770 \ifusingtt 2771 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2772 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2773 \next 2774} 2775\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2776\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2777 2778% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2779% character) is such as not to need one. 2780\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2781 \ifx\next,% 2782 \else\ifx\next-% 2783 \else\ifx\next.% 2784 \else\ifx\next\.% 2785 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2786 \else\ptexslash 2787 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2788 \aftersmartic 2789} 2790 2791% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2792\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2793 2794% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2795% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2796\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2797 2798\def\aftersmartic{} 2799\def\var#1{% 2800 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2801 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2802 \smartslanted{#1}% 2803} 2804 2805\let\i=\smartitalic 2806\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2807\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2808\let\emph=\smartitalic 2809 2810% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2811\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2812\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2813\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2814 2815% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2816\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2817\let\strong=\b 2818 2819% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2820\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2821 2822% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2823% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2824% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2825% 2826\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2827\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2828 2829% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2830% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2831% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2832% 2833\catcode`@=11 2834 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2835 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2836 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2837 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2838 } 2839 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2840 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2841 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2842 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2843 } 2844\catcode`@=\other 2845\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2846 2847% @t, explicit typewriter. 2848\def\t#1{% 2849 {\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2850 \null 2851} 2852 2853% @samp. 2854\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2855 2856% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2857\let\indicateurl=\samp 2858 2859% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2860% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2861% This is a subroutine for that. 2862\def\tclose#1{% 2863 {% 2864 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2865 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2866 % 2867 % Switch to typewriter. 2868 \tt 2869 % 2870 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2871 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2872 % 2873 % Turn off hyphenation. 2874 \nohyphenation 2875 % 2876 \plainfrenchspacing 2877 #1% 2878 }% 2879 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2880} 2881 2882% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2883% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2884% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2885% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2886% 2887% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2888% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2889% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2890% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2891{ 2892 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2893 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2894 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2895 % 2896 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2897 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2898 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2899 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2900 \ifallowcodebreaks 2901 \let-\codedash 2902 \let_\codeunder 2903 \else 2904 \let-\normaldash 2905 \let_\realunder 2906 \fi 2907 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2908 % after the hyphen. 2909 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2910 % 2911 \codex 2912 } 2913 % 2914 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2915 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2916 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2917 % 2918 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2919 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2920 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2921 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2922 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2923 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2924 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2925 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2926 \fi 2927 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2928 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2929 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2930 } 2931} 2932\def\normaldash{-} 2933% 2934\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2935 2936\def\codeunder{% 2937 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2938 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2939 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2940 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2941 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2942 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2943 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2944 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2945 {\_}% 2946} 2947 2948% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2949% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2950% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2951% and _ on and off. 2952% 2953\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2954 2955\def\keywordtrue{true} 2956\def\keywordfalse{false} 2957 2958\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2959 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2960 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2961 \allowcodebreakstrue 2962 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2963 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2964 \else 2965 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2966 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2967 \fi\fi 2968} 2969 2970% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2971% so use \code rather than \samp. 2972\let\command=\code 2973\let\env=\code 2974\let\file=\code 2975\let\option=\code 2976 2977% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2978% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2979% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2980% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2981 2982% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2983% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2984\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2985 2986% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 2987% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 2988% didn't support automatic breaking.) 2989\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2990\let\uref=\urefbreak 2991% 2992\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2993\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2994 \unsepspaces 2995 \pdfurl{#1}% 2996 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2997 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2998 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2999 \else 3000 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 3001 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3002 \ifpdf 3003 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3004 \ifurefurlonlylink 3005 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3006 \unhbox0 3007 \else 3008 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3009 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3010 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3011 \fi 3012 \else 3013 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3014 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3015 \else 3016 % For XeTeX 3017 \ifurefurlonlylink 3018 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3019 \unhbox0 3020 \else 3021 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3022 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3023 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3024 \fi 3025 \fi 3026 \fi 3027 \else 3028 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3029 \fi 3030 \fi 3031 \endlink 3032\endgroup} 3033 3034% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3035\def\urefcatcodes{% 3036 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3037 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3038 \catcode`\/=\active 3039} 3040{ 3041 \urefcatcodes 3042 % 3043 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3044 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 3045 \urefcatcodes 3046 \let&\urefcodeamp 3047 \let.\urefcodedot 3048 \let#\urefcodehash 3049 \let?\urefcodequest 3050 \let/\urefcodeslash 3051 \codex 3052 } 3053 % 3054 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3055 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3056 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3057 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3058 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3059 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3060} 3061 3062\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak} 3063\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak} 3064\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak} 3065\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak} 3066\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3067{ 3068 \catcode`\/=\active 3069 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3070 \urefprebreak \slashChar 3071 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3072 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3073 \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi 3074 } 3075} 3076 3077% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to 3078% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at 3079% all, for manual control. 3080% 3081\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3082 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3083 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3084 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3085 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3086 \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3087 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3088 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak} 3089 \else 3090 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3091 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3092 \fi\fi\fi 3093} 3094\def\wordafter{after} 3095\def\wordbefore{before} 3096\def\wordnone{none} 3097 3098% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. Putting stretch in 3099% between characters of the URL doesn't look good. 3100\def\urefallowbreak{% 3101 \hskip 0pt plus 4 em\relax 3102 \allowbreak 3103 \hskip 0pt plus -4 em\relax 3104} 3105 3106\urefbreakstyle after 3107 3108% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3109% 3110\let\url=\uref 3111 3112% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3113% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3114% 3115%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3116\ifpdforxetex 3117 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3118 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3119 \unsepspaces 3120 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3121 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3122 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3123 \endlink 3124 \endgroup} 3125\else 3126 \let\email=\uref 3127\fi 3128 3129% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3130% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3131% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3132\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3133 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3134 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3135 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3136 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3137 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3138 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3139 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3140 \else 3141 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3142 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3143 \fi\fi\fi 3144} 3145\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3146\def\wordexample{example} 3147\def\wordcode{code} 3148 3149% Default is `distinct'. 3150\kbdinputstyle distinct 3151 3152% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3153% then @kbd has no effect. 3154\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3155 3156\def\xkey{\key} 3157\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3158 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3159 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3160 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3161 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3162} 3163 3164% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3165%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3166%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3167%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3168% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3169% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3170% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3171% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3172% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3173 3174% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3175% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3176% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3177% 3178\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 3179 \nohyphenation 3180 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3181 #1}\null} 3182 3183% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3184\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3185 3186% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3187\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3188\def\click{\arrow} 3189 3190% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3191% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3192% 3193\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3194 3195% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3196% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3197% all-uppercase. 3198% 3199\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3200\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3201 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3202 \def\temp{#2}% 3203 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3204 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3205 \fi 3206 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3207} 3208 3209% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3210% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3211% 3212\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3213\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3214 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3215 \def\temp{#2}% 3216 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3217 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3218 \fi 3219 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3220} 3221 3222% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3223% 3224\def\asis#1{#1} 3225 3226% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3227% 3228% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3229% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3230% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3231% which is what @var uses. 3232{ 3233 \catcode`\_ = \active 3234 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3235 \catcode`\_=\active 3236 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3237 } 3238} 3239% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3240% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3241% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3242% 3243% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3244\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3245% 3246\def\math{% 3247 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3248 \tex 3249 \mathunderscore 3250 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3251 \mathactive 3252 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3253 \let\"=\ddot 3254 \let\'=\acute 3255 \let\==\bar 3256 \let\^=\hat 3257 \let\`=\grave 3258 \let\u=\breve 3259 \let\v=\check 3260 \let\~=\tilde 3261 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3262 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3263 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3264 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3265} 3266\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3267 3268% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3269% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3270% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3271% 3272{ 3273 \catcode`^ = \active 3274 \catcode`< = \active 3275 \catcode`> = \active 3276 \catcode`+ = \active 3277 \catcode`' = \active 3278 \gdef\mathactive{% 3279 \let^ = \ptexhat 3280 \let< = \ptexless 3281 \let> = \ptexgtr 3282 \let+ = \ptexplus 3283 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3284 } 3285} 3286 3287% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3288% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3289% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3290% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3291% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3292% 3293\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3294\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3295% 3296\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3297\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3298 3299% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3300% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3301% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3302% 3303\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3304% 3305\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3306\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3307 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3308 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3309} 3310% 3311% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3312% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3313\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3314\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3315 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3316 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3317} 3318% 3319% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3320% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3321% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3322% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3323% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3324% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3325% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3326% 3327\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3328\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3329\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3330 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3331 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3332 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3333} 3334 3335% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3336% 3337\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3338\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3339 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3340 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3341 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3342} 3343 3344% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3345% 3346\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3347\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3348 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3349 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3350} 3351 3352 3353\message{glyphs,} 3354% and logos. 3355 3356% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3357\def\@{\char64 } 3358\let\atchar=\@ 3359 3360% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3361\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3362\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3363\let\{=\lbracechar 3364\let\}=\rbracechar 3365 3366% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3367\let\comma = , 3368 3369% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3370% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3371\let\, = \ptexc 3372\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3373\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3374\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3375\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3376\let\udotaccent = \d 3377 3378% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3379% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3380\def\questiondown{?`} 3381\def\exclamdown{!`} 3382\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3383\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3384 3385% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3386\def\imacro{i} 3387\def\jmacro{j} 3388\def\dotless#1{% 3389 \def\temp{#1}% 3390 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3391 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3392 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3393 \fi\fi 3394} 3395 3396% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3397% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3398% 3399\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3400 3401% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3402% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3403% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3404% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3405% \scriptscriptstyle). 3406% 3407\def\LaTeX{% 3408 L\kern-.36em 3409 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3410 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3411 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3412 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3413 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3414 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3415 \else 3416 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3417 \switchtolllsize A% 3418 \fi 3419 }% 3420 \vss 3421 }}% 3422 \kern-.15em 3423 \TeX 3424} 3425 3426% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3427% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3428% but safer, and can't hurt. 3429\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3430\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3431% 3432\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3433\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3434\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3435\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3436 3437% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3438% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3439% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3440% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3441% whichever is larger. 3442% 3443\def\dots{% 3444 \leavevmode 3445 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3446 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3447 \dimen0 = \wd0 3448 \else 3449 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3450 \fi 3451 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3452 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3453 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3454 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3455 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3456 }% 3457} 3458 3459% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3460% 3461\def\enddots{% 3462 \dots 3463 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3464} 3465 3466% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3467% 3468% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3469% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3470% 3471\def\point{$\star$} 3472\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3473\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3474\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3475\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3476\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3477 3478% The @error{} command. 3479% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3480% 3481\newbox\errorbox 3482% 3483{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3484\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3485% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3486\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3487% 3488\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3489 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3490 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3491 \vbox{% 3492 \hrule height\dimen2 3493 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3494 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3495 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3496 \hrule height\dimen2} 3497 \hfil} 3498% 3499\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3500 3501% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3502% 3503\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3504 3505% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3506% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3507% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3508% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3509% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3510% 3511% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3512% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3513% font height. 3514% 3515% feymr - regular 3516% feymo - slanted 3517% feybr - bold 3518% feybo - bold slanted 3519% 3520% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3521% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3522% Hmm. 3523% 3524% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3525% Hope not. 3526% 3527% 3528\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3529\def\eurofont{% 3530 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3531 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3532 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3533 % font installed. 3534 % 3535 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3536 % that to the current nominal size. 3537 % 3538 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3539 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3540 % 3541 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3542 % 3543 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3544 % bold: 3545 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3546 \else 3547 % regular: 3548 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3549 \fi 3550 \thiseurofont 3551} 3552 3553% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3554% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3555% the redefinition. 3556% 3557% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3558\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3559\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3560\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3561\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3562% 3563\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3564\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3565\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3566\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3567\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3568\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3569\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3570\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3571% 3572% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3573% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3574% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3575% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3576% 3577% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3578% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3579% the same EC font. 3580\def\ogonek#1{{% 3581 \def\temp{#1}% 3582 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3583 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3584 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3585 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3586 \else 3587 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3588 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3589 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3590 \fi 3591 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3592 }% 3593} 3594\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3595\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3596\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3597\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3598% 3599% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3600% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3601% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3602% package and follow the same conventions. 3603% 3604\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3605\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3606% 3607\def\etcfont#1{% 3608 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3609 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3610 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3611 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3612 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3613 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3614 \ifmonospace 3615 % typewriter: 3616 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3617 \else 3618 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3619 % bold: 3620 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3621 \else 3622 % regular: 3623 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3624 \fi 3625 \fi 3626 \thisecfont 3627} 3628 3629% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3630% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3631% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3632% 3633\def\registeredsymbol{% 3634 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3635 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3636 }$% 3637} 3638 3639% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3640% 3641\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3642 3643% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3644% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3645% so we'll define it if necessary. 3646% 3647\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3648\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3649\fi 3650 3651% Quotes. 3652\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3653\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3654\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3655\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3656 3657 3658\message{page headings,} 3659 3660\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3661\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3662 3663% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3664\newif\ifseenauthor 3665\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3666 3667% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3668% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3669\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3670 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3671 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3672 after the title page.}}% 3673\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3674 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3675 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3676 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3677 3678\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3679 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3680 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3681 3682\envdef\titlepage{% 3683 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3684 \begingroup 3685 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3686 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3687 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3688 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3689 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3690 % 3691 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3692 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3693 \let\oldpage = \page 3694 \def\page{% 3695 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3696 \finishtitlepage 3697 \fi 3698 \let\page = \oldpage 3699 \page 3700 \null 3701 }% 3702} 3703 3704\def\Etitlepage{% 3705 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3706 \finishtitlepage 3707 \fi 3708 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3709 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3710 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3711 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3712 \oldpage 3713 \endgroup 3714 % 3715 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3716 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3717 \HEADINGSon 3718} 3719 3720\def\finishtitlepage{% 3721 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3722 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3723 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3724} 3725 3726% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3727% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3728% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3729% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3730% 3731\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3732 \rm 3733 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3734 \parindent=0pt 3735 \tolerance=5000 3736 \ptexraggedright 3737} 3738 3739% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3740 3741\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3742\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3743 3744\parseargdef\title{% 3745 \checkenv\titlepage 3746 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3747 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3748 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3749 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3750} 3751 3752\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3753 \checkenv\titlepage 3754 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3755} 3756 3757% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3758% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3759% 3760\parseargdef\author{% 3761 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3762 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3763 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3764 \else 3765 \checkenv\titlepage 3766 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3767 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3768 \fi 3769} 3770 3771 3772% Set up page headings and footings. 3773 3774\let\thispage=\folio 3775 3776\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3777\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3778\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3779\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3780 3781% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3782\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3783 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3784\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3785 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3786\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3787 3788% Commands to set those variables. 3789% For example, this is what @headings on does 3790% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3791% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3792% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3793% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3794 3795 3796\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3797\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3798\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3799\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3800 3801\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3802\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3803\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3804\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3805 3806\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3807 3808\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3809\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3810\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3811\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3812 3813\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3814\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3815\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3816 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3817 % 3818 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3819 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3820 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3821 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3822} 3823 3824\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3825 3826% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3827% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3828% 3829% The same set of arguments for: 3830% 3831% @oddheadingmarks 3832% @evenfootingmarks 3833% @oddfootingmarks 3834% @everyheadingmarks 3835% @everyfootingmarks 3836 3837% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3838% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3839% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3840% 3841\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3842\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3843\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3844\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3845\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3846 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3847\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3848 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3849% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3850\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3851 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3852 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3853} 3854 3855\everyheadingmarks bottom 3856\everyfootingmarks bottom 3857 3858% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3859% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3860% @headings off turns them off. 3861% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3862% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3863% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3864% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3865% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3866% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3867 3868\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3869 3870\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3871 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3872 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3873} 3874 3875\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3876\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3877 3878% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3879% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3880% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3881% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3882% edge of all pages. 3883\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3884\global\pageno=1 3885\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3886\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3887\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3888\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3889\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3890} 3891\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3892 3893% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3894% page number on top right. 3895\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3896\global\pageno=1 3897\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3898\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3899\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3900\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3901\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3902} 3903\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3904 3905\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3906\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3907\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3908\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3909\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3910\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3911\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3912\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3913} 3914 3915\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3916\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3917\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3918\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3919\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3920\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3921\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3922} 3923 3924% Subroutines used in generating headings 3925% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3926% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3927% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3928\ifx\today\thisisundefined 3929\def\today{% 3930 \number\day\space 3931 \ifcase\month 3932 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3933 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3934 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3935 \fi 3936 \space\number\year} 3937\fi 3938 3939% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3940% It generates no output of its own. 3941\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3942\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3943 3944 3945\message{tables,} 3946% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3947 3948% default indentation of table text 3949\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3950% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3951\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3952% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3953\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3954 3955% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3956\newdimen\itemmax 3957 3958% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3959% these defs. 3960% They also define \itemindex 3961% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3962 3963\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3964 3965\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3966 3967\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3968\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3969 3970\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3971 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3972 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3973 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3974 \itemindex{#1}% 3975 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3976 % 3977 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3978 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3979 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3980 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3981 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3982 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3983 % 3984 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3985 % but leave it ragged-right. 3986 \begingroup 3987 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3988 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3989 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 3990 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3991 \endgroup 3992 % 3993 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3994 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3995 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3996 % 3997 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3998 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3999 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4000 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4001 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4002 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4003 % 4004 \penalty 10001 4005 \endgroup 4006 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4007 \else 4008 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4009 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4010 \noindent 4011 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4012 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4013 % eventually be printed. 4014 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4015 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4016 \unhbox0 4017 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4018 \endgroup 4019 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4020 \fi 4021} 4022 4023\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4024\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4025 4026% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4027\envdef\table{% 4028 \let\itemindex\gobble 4029 \tablecheck{table}% 4030} 4031\envdef\ftable{% 4032 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4033 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4034} 4035\envdef\vtable{% 4036 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4037 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4038} 4039\def\tablecheck#1{% 4040 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4041 \endgroup 4042 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4043 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4044 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4045 \else 4046 \let\next\tablex 4047 \fi 4048 \next 4049} 4050\def\tablex#1{% 4051 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4052 \parsearg\tabley 4053} 4054\def\tabley#1{% 4055 {% 4056 \makevalueexpandable 4057 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4058 \expandafter 4059 }\temp \endtablez 4060} 4061\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4062 \aboveenvbreak 4063 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4064 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4065 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4066 \itemmax=\tableindent 4067 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4068 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4069 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4070 \parindent = 0pt 4071 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4072 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4073 \let\item = \internalBitem 4074 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4075} 4076\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4077\let\Eftable\Etable 4078\let\Evtable\Etable 4079\let\Eitemize\Etable 4080\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4081 4082% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4083 4084\newcount \itemno 4085 4086\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4087 4088\def\doitemize#1{% 4089 \aboveenvbreak 4090 \itemmax=\itemindent 4091 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4092 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4093 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4094 \parindent=0pt 4095 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4096 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4097 % 4098 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4099 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4100 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4101 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4102 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4103 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4104 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4105 % 4106 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4107 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4108 % 4109 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4110} 4111 4112% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4113% 4114\def\itemizeitem{% 4115 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4116 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4117 {% 4118 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4119 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4120 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4121 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4122 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4123 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4124 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4125 % that's the theory. 4126 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4127 \noindent 4128 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4129 % 4130 \ifinner\else 4131 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4132 \fi 4133 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4134 % @itemize looks awful there. 4135 }% 4136 \flushcr 4137} 4138 4139% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4140% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4141% 4142\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4143 4144% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4145% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4146% argument is the same as `1'. 4147% 4148\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4149\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4150 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4151 \def\thearg{#1}% 4152 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4153 % 4154 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4155 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4156 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4157 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4158 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4159 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4160 \ifx\rest\empty 4161 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4162 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4163 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4164 % not equal to itself. 4165 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4166 % 4167 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4168 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4169 % 4170 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4171 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4172 \else 4173 % It's a letter. 4174 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4175 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4176 \else 4177 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4178 \fi 4179 \fi 4180 \else 4181 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4182 \numericenumerate 4183 \fi 4184} 4185 4186% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4187% given in \thearg. 4188% 4189\def\numericenumerate{% 4190 \itemno = \thearg 4191 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4192} 4193 4194% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4195\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4196 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4197 \startenumeration{% 4198 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4199 \ifnum\itemno=0 4200 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4201 alphabet}% 4202 \fi 4203 \char\lccode\itemno 4204 }% 4205} 4206 4207% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4208\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4209 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4210 \startenumeration{% 4211 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4212 \ifnum\itemno=0 4213 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4214 alphabet} 4215 \fi 4216 \char\uccode\itemno 4217 }% 4218} 4219 4220% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4221% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4222% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4223% 4224\def\startenumeration#1{% 4225 \advance\itemno by -1 4226 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4227} 4228 4229% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 4230% to @enumerate. 4231% 4232\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 4233\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 4234\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4235\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4236 4237 4238% @multitable macros 4239% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 4240% 4241% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 4242% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 4243% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 4244% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 4245 4246% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 4247 4248% To make preamble: 4249% 4250% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 4251% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 4252% @item ... 4253% 4254% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 4255% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 4256% columns as desired. 4257 4258 4259% Or use a template: 4260% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4261% @item ... 4262% using the widest term desired in each column. 4263 4264% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 4265% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 4266% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 4267% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 4268 4269% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 4270% if they are. 4271 4272% Sample multitable: 4273 4274% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4275% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 4276% @item 4277% first col stuff 4278% @tab 4279% second col stuff 4280% @tab 4281% third col 4282% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 4283% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 4284% 4285% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 4286% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 4287% @end multitable 4288 4289% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 4290% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 4291% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 4292% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 4293% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 4294% to baseline. 4295% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 4296% 4297\newskip\multitableparskip 4298\newskip\multitableparindent 4299\newdimen\multitablecolspace 4300\newskip\multitablelinespace 4301\multitableparskip=0pt 4302\multitableparindent=6pt 4303\multitablecolspace=12pt 4304\multitablelinespace=0pt 4305 4306% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4307% 4308\let\endsetuptable\relax 4309\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4310\let\columnfractions\relax 4311\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4312\newif\ifsetpercent 4313 4314% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4315% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4316% 4317\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4318 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4319 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4320 \setuptable 4321} 4322 4323\newcount\colcount 4324\def\setuptable#1{% 4325 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4326 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4327 \let\go = \relax 4328 \else 4329 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4330 \global\setpercenttrue 4331 \else 4332 \ifsetpercent 4333 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4334 \else 4335 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4336 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4337 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4338 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4339 \fi 4340 \fi 4341 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4342 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4343 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4344 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4345 \else 4346 \let\go = \setuptable 4347 \fi% 4348 \fi 4349 \go 4350} 4351 4352% multitable-only commands. 4353% 4354% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4355% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4356% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4357% undo it ourselves. 4358\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4359\def\headitem{% 4360 \checkenv\multitable 4361 \crcr 4362 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4363 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4364 \the\everytab % for the first item 4365}% 4366% 4367% default for tables with no headings. 4368\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4369% 4370% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 4371% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 4372% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 4373% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 4374\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4375 4376% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 4377% 4378\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4379% 4380\envdef\multitable{% 4381 \vskip\parskip 4382 \startsavinginserts 4383 % 4384 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4385 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4386 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4387 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4388 \def\item{\crcr}% 4389 % 4390 \tolerance=9500 4391 \hbadness=9500 4392 \setmultitablespacing 4393 \parskip=\multitableparskip 4394 \parindent=\multitableparindent 4395 \overfullrule=0pt 4396 \global\colcount=0 4397 % 4398 \everycr = {% 4399 \noalign{% 4400 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4401 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4402 % 4403 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4404 \checkinserts 4405 % 4406 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4407 \headitemcrhook 4408 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4409 }% 4410 }% 4411 % 4412 \parsearg\domultitable 4413} 4414\def\domultitable#1{% 4415 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4416 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4417 % 4418 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4419 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4420 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4421 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4422 \halign\bgroup &% 4423 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4424 \multistrut 4425 \vtop{% 4426 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4427 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4428 % 4429 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4430 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4431 % the first one. 4432 % 4433 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4434 % to the width of each template entry. 4435 % 4436 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4437 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4438 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4439 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4440 % 4441 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4442 \rightskip=0pt 4443 \ifnum\colcount=1 4444 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4445 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4446 \else 4447 \ifsetpercent \else 4448 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4449 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4450 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4451 \fi 4452 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4453 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4454 \fi 4455 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4456 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4457 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4458 % For example: 4459 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4460 % @item @code{#} 4461 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4462 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4463 % marking characters. 4464 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4465 }\cr 4466} 4467\def\Emultitable{% 4468 \crcr 4469 \egroup % end the \halign 4470 \global\setpercentfalse 4471} 4472 4473\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4474 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4475 % 4476 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4477 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4478 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4479 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4480\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4481\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4482\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4483\fi 4484% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4485% table. If not, do nothing. 4486% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4487\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4488\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4489\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4490 % than skip between lines in the table. 4491\fi% 4492\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4493\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4494\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4495 % than skip between lines in the table. 4496\fi} 4497 4498 4499\message{conditionals,} 4500 4501% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4502% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4503% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4504% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4505% attempt to close an environment group. 4506% 4507\def\makecond#1{% 4508 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4509 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4510} 4511\makecond{iftex} 4512\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4513\makecond{ifnothtml} 4514\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4515\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4516\makecond{ifnotxml} 4517 4518% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4519% 4520\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4521\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4522\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4523\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4524\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4525\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4526\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4527\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4528\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4529\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4530\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4531\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4532\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4533 4534% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4535% 4536% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4537\newcount\doignorecount 4538 4539\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4540 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4541 \obeylines 4542 \catcode`\@ = \other 4543 \catcode`\{ = \other 4544 \catcode`\} = \other 4545 % 4546 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4547 \spaceisspace 4548 % 4549 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4550 \doignorecount = 0 4551 % 4552 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4553 \dodoignore{#1}% 4554} 4555 4556{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4557 \obeylines % 4558 % 4559 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4560 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4561 % 4562 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4563 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4564 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4565 % 4566 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4567 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4568 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4569 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4570 % 4571 % And now expand that command. 4572 \doignoretext ^^M% 4573 }% 4574} 4575 4576\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4577 \def\temp{#1}% 4578 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4579 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4580 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4581 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4582 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4583 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4584 \fi 4585 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4586} 4587 4588% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4589% 4590\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4591 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4592 \let\next\enddoignore 4593 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4594 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4595 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4596 \fi 4597 \next 4598} 4599 4600% Finish off ignored text. 4601{ \obeylines% 4602 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4603 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4604 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4605 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4606} 4607 4608 4609% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4610% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4611% 4612% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4613% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4614% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4615% didn't need it. 4616% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4617% 4618\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4619\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4620 {% 4621 \makevalueexpandable 4622 \def\temp{#2}% 4623 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4624 \ifx\temp\empty 4625 \next{}% 4626 \else 4627 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4628 \fi 4629 }% 4630} 4631% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4632\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4633 4634% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4635% 4636\parseargdef\clear{% 4637 {% 4638 \makevalueexpandable 4639 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4640 }% 4641} 4642 4643% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4644\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4645\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4646{ 4647 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4648 % 4649 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4650 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4651 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4652 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4653 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4654 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4655 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4656 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4657 } 4658} 4659 4660\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4661 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4662 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4663 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4664 \else 4665 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4666 \fi 4667} 4668 4669% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4670% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4671% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4672% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4673% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4674% 4675% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4676\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4677 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4678 \noexpand\value{#1}% 4679 \else 4680 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4681 \fi 4682} 4683 4684% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4685% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4686\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4687 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4688 ZZZZZZZ% 4689 \else 4690 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4691 \fi 4692} 4693 4694% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4695% with @set. 4696% 4697% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4698% \makecond and then redefine. 4699% 4700\makecond{ifset} 4701\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4702\def\doifset#1#2{% 4703 {% 4704 \makevalueexpandable 4705 \let\next=\empty 4706 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4707 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4708 \fi 4709 \expandafter 4710 }\next 4711} 4712\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4713 4714% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4715% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4716% 4717% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4718% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4719% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4720% 4721\makecond{ifclear} 4722\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4723\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4724 4725% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4726% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4727% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4728% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4729% 4730\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4731\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4732% 4733\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4734 \makevalueexpandable 4735 \let\next=\empty 4736 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4737 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4738 \fi 4739 \expandafter 4740 }\next 4741} 4742\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4743 4744% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4745\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4746\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4747 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4748\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4749 4750% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4751% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4752\set txicommandconditionals 4753 4754% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4755% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4756\let\dircategory=\comment 4757 4758% @defininfoenclose. 4759\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4760 4761 4762\message{indexing,} 4763% Index generation facilities 4764 4765% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4766% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4767\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4768 4769% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4770% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4771% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4772% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4773% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4774% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4775% for the sake of vms. 4776% 4777\def\newindex#1{% 4778 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4779 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4780 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4781} 4782 4783% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4784% 4785\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4786 4787% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4788% 4789\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4790% 4791\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4792 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4793 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4794 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4795} 4796 4797% The default indices: 4798\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4799\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4800\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4801\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4802\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4803\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4804 4805 4806% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4807% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4808% 4809% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4810% inside @code. 4811% 4812\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4813\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4814 4815% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4816% #3 the target index (bar). 4817\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4818 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4819 % redefine \fooindfile: 4820 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4821 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4822 % redefine \fooindex: 4823 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4824} 4825 4826% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4827% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4828% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4829 4830\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4831\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4832 4833% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4834\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4835\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4836 4837 4838% Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo 4839% commands. 4840% 4841\def\atdummies{% 4842 \definedummyletter\@% 4843 \definedummyletter\ % 4844 \definedummyletter\{% 4845 \definedummyletter\}% 4846 % 4847 % Do the redefinitions. 4848 \definedummies 4849 \otherbackslash 4850} 4851 4852% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4853% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4854% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4855% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4856% from whatever follows. 4857% 4858% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4859% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4860% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4861% 4862% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4863% space. 4864% 4865\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4866\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4867\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4868 4869% Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands. 4870% 4871\def\definedummies{% 4872 % 4873 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4874 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4875 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4876 \commondummiesnofonts 4877 % 4878 \definedummyletter\_% 4879 \definedummyletter\-% 4880 % 4881 % Non-English letters. 4882 \definedummyword\AA 4883 \definedummyword\AE 4884 \definedummyword\DH 4885 \definedummyword\L 4886 \definedummyword\O 4887 \definedummyword\OE 4888 \definedummyword\TH 4889 \definedummyword\aa 4890 \definedummyword\ae 4891 \definedummyword\dh 4892 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4893 \definedummyword\l 4894 \definedummyword\o 4895 \definedummyword\oe 4896 \definedummyword\ordf 4897 \definedummyword\ordm 4898 \definedummyword\questiondown 4899 \definedummyword\ss 4900 \definedummyword\th 4901 % 4902 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4903 \definedummyword\bf 4904 \definedummyword\gtr 4905 \definedummyword\hat 4906 \definedummyword\less 4907 \definedummyword\sf 4908 \definedummyword\sl 4909 \definedummyword\tclose 4910 \definedummyword\tt 4911 % 4912 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4913 \definedummyword\TeX 4914 % 4915 % Assorted special characters. 4916 \definedummyword\atchar 4917 \definedummyword\arrow 4918 \definedummyword\backslashchar 4919 \definedummyword\bullet 4920 \definedummyword\comma 4921 \definedummyword\copyright 4922 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4923 \definedummyword\dots 4924 \definedummyword\enddots 4925 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4926 \definedummyword\equiv 4927 \definedummyword\error 4928 \definedummyword\euro 4929 \definedummyword\expansion 4930 \definedummyword\geq 4931 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4932 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4933 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4934 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4935 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4936 \definedummyword\leq 4937 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4938 \definedummyword\minus 4939 \definedummyword\ogonek 4940 \definedummyword\pounds 4941 \definedummyword\point 4942 \definedummyword\print 4943 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4944 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4945 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4946 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4947 \definedummyword\quoteright 4948 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4949 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4950 \definedummyword\result 4951 \definedummyword\sub 4952 \definedummyword\sup 4953 \definedummyword\textdegree 4954 % 4955 \definedummyword\subentry 4956 % 4957 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4958 \macrolist 4959 \let\value\dummyvalue 4960 % 4961 \normalturnoffactive 4962} 4963 4964% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 4965% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 4966% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 4967% 4968\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4969 % Control letters and accents. 4970 \commondummyletter\!% 4971 \commondummyaccent\"% 4972 \commondummyaccent\'% 4973 \commondummyletter\*% 4974 \commondummyaccent\,% 4975 \commondummyletter\.% 4976 \commondummyletter\/% 4977 \commondummyletter\:% 4978 \commondummyaccent\=% 4979 \commondummyletter\?% 4980 \commondummyaccent\^% 4981 \commondummyaccent\`% 4982 \commondummyaccent\~% 4983 \commondummyword\u 4984 \commondummyword\v 4985 \commondummyword\H 4986 \commondummyword\dotaccent 4987 \commondummyword\ogonek 4988 \commondummyword\ringaccent 4989 \commondummyword\tieaccent 4990 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 4991 \commondummyword\udotaccent 4992 \commondummyword\dotless 4993 % 4994 % Texinfo font commands. 4995 \commondummyword\b 4996 \commondummyword\i 4997 \commondummyword\r 4998 \commondummyword\sansserif 4999 \commondummyword\sc 5000 \commondummyword\slanted 5001 \commondummyword\t 5002 % 5003 % Commands that take arguments. 5004 \commondummyword\abbr 5005 \commondummyword\acronym 5006 \commondummyword\anchor 5007 \commondummyword\cite 5008 \commondummyword\code 5009 \commondummyword\command 5010 \commondummyword\dfn 5011 \commondummyword\dmn 5012 \commondummyword\email 5013 \commondummyword\emph 5014 \commondummyword\env 5015 \commondummyword\file 5016 \commondummyword\image 5017 \commondummyword\indicateurl 5018 \commondummyword\inforef 5019 \commondummyword\kbd 5020 \commondummyword\key 5021 \commondummyword\math 5022 \commondummyword\option 5023 \commondummyword\pxref 5024 \commondummyword\ref 5025 \commondummyword\samp 5026 \commondummyword\strong 5027 \commondummyword\tie 5028 \commondummyword\U 5029 \commondummyword\uref 5030 \commondummyword\url 5031 \commondummyword\var 5032 \commondummyword\verb 5033 \commondummyword\w 5034 \commondummyword\xref 5035} 5036 5037\let\indexlbrace\relax 5038\let\indexrbrace\relax 5039\let\indexatchar\relax 5040\let\indexbackslash\relax 5041 5042{\catcode`\@=0 5043\catcode`\\=13 5044 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 5045} 5046 5047{ 5048\catcode`\<=13 5049\catcode`\-=13 5050\catcode`\`=13 5051 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5052 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5053 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5054 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5055 \let`=\empty 5056 \fi 5057 % 5058 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5059 \backslashdisappear 5060 \fi 5061 % 5062 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5063 \def-{}% 5064 \fi 5065 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5066 \def<{}% 5067 \fi 5068 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5069 \def\@{}% 5070 \fi 5071 } 5072 5073 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5074 \let-\normaldash 5075 \let<\normalless 5076 } 5077} 5078 5079 5080% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5081% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5082% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5083% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5084% 5085\def\indexnofonts{% 5086 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5087 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5088 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5089 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5090 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5091 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5092 \commondummiesnofonts 5093 % 5094 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5095 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5096 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5097 %\let\tt=\asis 5098 % 5099 \def\ { }% 5100 \def\@{@}% 5101 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5102 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5103 % 5104 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5105 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5106 \let\lbracechar\{% 5107 \let\rbracechar\}% 5108 % 5109 % Non-English letters. 5110 \def\AA{AA}% 5111 \def\AE{AE}% 5112 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5113 \def\L{L}% 5114 \def\OE{OE}% 5115 \def\O{O}% 5116 \def\TH{TH}% 5117 \def\aa{aa}% 5118 \def\ae{ae}% 5119 \def\dh{dzz}% 5120 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5121 \def\l{l}% 5122 \def\oe{oe}% 5123 \def\ordf{a}% 5124 \def\ordm{o}% 5125 \def\o{o}% 5126 \def\questiondown{?}% 5127 \def\ss{ss}% 5128 \def\th{th}% 5129 % 5130 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5131 \def\TeX{TeX}% 5132 % 5133 % Assorted special characters. \defglyph gives the control sequence a 5134 % definition that removes the {} that follows its use. 5135 \defglyph\atchar{@}% 5136 \defglyph\arrow{->}% 5137 \defglyph\bullet{bullet}% 5138 \defglyph\comma{,}% 5139 \defglyph\copyright{copyright}% 5140 \defglyph\dots{...}% 5141 \defglyph\enddots{...}% 5142 \defglyph\equiv{==}% 5143 \defglyph\error{error}% 5144 \defglyph\euro{euro}% 5145 \defglyph\expansion{==>}% 5146 \defglyph\geq{>=}% 5147 \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}% 5148 \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}% 5149 \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}% 5150 \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}% 5151 \defglyph\leq{<=}% 5152 \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}% 5153 \defglyph\minus{-}% 5154 \defglyph\point{.}% 5155 \defglyph\pounds{pounds}% 5156 \defglyph\print{-|}% 5157 \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}% 5158 \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}% 5159 \defglyph\quotedblright{"}% 5160 \defglyph\quoteleft{`}% 5161 \defglyph\quoteright{'}% 5162 \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}% 5163 \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}% 5164 \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}% 5165 \defglyph\result{=>}% 5166 \defglyph\textdegree{o}% 5167 % 5168 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5169 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5170 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5171 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5172 % that starts with \. 5173 % 5174 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5175 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5176 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5177 % 5178 \macrolist 5179 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5180} 5181\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5187\def\doind#1#2{% 5188 \iflinks 5189 {% 5190 % 5191 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5192 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5193 % 5194 \def\indextext{#2}% 5195 \safewhatsit\doindwrite 5196 }% 5197 \fi 5198} 5199 5200% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5201\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5202\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5203 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5204 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5205 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5206 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5207 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5208 % Open the file 5209 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5210 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5211 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5212 % preceding skips. 5213 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5214\fi} 5215\def\indexisfl{fl} 5216 5217% Definition for writing index entry sort key. 5218{ 5219\catcode`\-=13 5220\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5221 \begingroup 5222 \indexnonalnumreappear 5223 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5224\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5225 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5226} 5227 5228\def\indexwriteseealso#1{ 5229 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}% 5230} 5231\def\indexwriteseeentry#1{ 5232 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}% 5233} 5234 5235% The default definitions 5236\def\sortas#1{}% 5237\def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5238\def\putwordSeeAlso{See also} 5239\def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5240 5241 5242% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}": 5243% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}" 5244% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ" 5245% * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext 5246% 5247\def\splitindexentry#1{% 5248 \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}% 5249 \xdef\bracedtext{}% 5250 \def\sep{}% 5251 \def\seealso##1{}% 5252 \def\seeentry##1{}% 5253 \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry 5254} 5255 5256% append the results from the next segment 5257\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{% 5258 \def\segment{#1}% 5259 \ifx\segment\isfinish 5260 \else 5261 % 5262 % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and 5263 % trim spaces. 5264 \edef\trimmed{\segment}% 5265 \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5266 % 5267 \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}% 5268 % 5269 % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all 5270 % font commands turned off. 5271 \bgroup 5272 \let\sortas\indexwritesortas 5273 \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso 5274 \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry 5275 \indexnofonts 5276 % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex. 5277 \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}% 5278 \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}% 5279 \let\{=\lbracechar 5280 \let\}=\rbracechar 5281 \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}% 5282 \def\atchar##1{\@}% 5283 \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}% 5284 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}% 5285 % 5286 \let\indexsortkey\empty 5287 \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty 5288 % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes 5289 % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment. 5290 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}% 5291 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{% 5292 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5293 \xdef\trimmed{\segment}% 5294 \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5295 \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}% 5296 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5297 }\fi 5298 % 5299 % Append to \fullindexsortkey. 5300 \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{% 5301 \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}% 5302 \tmp 5303 \egroup 5304 \def\sep{\subentry}% 5305 % 5306 \expandafter\doindexsegment 5307 \fi 5308} 5309\def\isfinish{\finish}% 5310\newbox\dummybox % used above 5311 5312\let\subentry\relax 5313 5314% Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex. 5315% This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux 5316% files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses 5317% the current value of \escapechar. 5318\def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\} 5319 5320% Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape 5321% character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When 5322% the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then 5323% the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy 5324% change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in 5325% index files, never standing for themselves. 5326% 5327\set txiindexescapeisbackslash 5328 5329% Write the entry in \indextext to the index file. 5330% 5331\def\doindwrite{% 5332 \maybemarginindex 5333 % 5334 \atdummies 5335 % 5336 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else 5337 \escapeisbackslash 5338 \fi 5339 % 5340 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 5341 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 5342 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 5343 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}% 5344 % 5345 % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index 5346 % sort key. 5347 \splitindexentry\indextext 5348 % 5349 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5350 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5351 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5352 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5353 % sorted result. 5354 % 5355 \edef\temp{% 5356 \write\writeto{% 5357 \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}% 5358 {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}% 5359 \bracedtext}% 5360 }% 5361 \temp 5362} 5363 5364% Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented). 5365\def\maybemarginindex{% 5366 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5367 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}% 5368 \fi 5369} 5370\let\SETmarginindex=\relax 5371 5372 5373% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5374% 5375% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5376% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5377% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5378% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5379% sequences like this: 5380% @end defun 5381% @tindex whatever 5382% @defun ... 5383% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5384% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5385% the previous defun. 5386% 5387% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5388% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5389% 5390% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5391% 5392% But wait, there is a catch there: 5393% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5394% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5395% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5396% representation of the skip. 5397% 5398% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5399% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5400% 5401\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5402% 5403\newskip\whatsitskip 5404\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5405% 5406% ..., ready, GO: 5407% 5408\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5409 #1% 5410 \else 5411 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5412 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5413 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5414 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5415 % 5416 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5417 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5418 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5419 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5420 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5421 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5422 \else 5423 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5424 \fi 5425 % 5426 #1% 5427 % 5428 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5429 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5430 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5431 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5432 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5433 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5434 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5435 % @vindex index-whatever 5436 % Description. 5437 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5438 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5439 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5440 \else 5441 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5442 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5443 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5444 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5445 \fi 5446\fi} 5447 5448% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5449% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5450% or 5451% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5452% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5453% containing these kinds of lines: 5454% \initial {c} 5455% before the first topic whose initial is c 5456% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5457% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5458% \primary {topic} 5459% \entry {topic}{} 5460% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5461% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5462% for each subtopic. 5463% \secondary {subtopic}{} 5464% for a subtopic with sub-subtopics 5465% \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist} 5466% for each sub-subtopic. 5467 5468% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5469% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5470 5471\def\findex {\fnindex} 5472\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5473\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5474\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5475\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5476\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5477 5478% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5479 5480% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5481% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5482% 5483\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5484 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5485 % 5486 \smallfonts \rm 5487 \tolerance = 9500 5488 \plainfrenchspacing 5489 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5490 % 5491 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5492 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5493 % 5494 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5495 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5496 \ifeof 1 5497 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5498 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5499 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5500 % there is some text. 5501 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5502 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5503 \else 5504 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5505 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5506 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5507 \read 1 to \thisline 5508 \ifeof 1 5509 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5510 \else 5511 \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish% 5512 \fi 5513 \fi 5514 \closein 1 5515\endgroup} 5516 5517% If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index 5518% file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have 5519% old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would 5520% at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error. 5521\def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{% 5522 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax 5523 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1 5524 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax 5525\errmessage{% 5526ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped. 5527To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi' 5528or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>. 5529If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo 5530distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0). 5531You may be able to typeset the index if you run 5532'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself. 5533You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by 5534running a command like 5535'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do 5536this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format. 5537If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again 5538might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')% 5539}% 5540 \else 5541 (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format) 5542 \fi 5543 \else 5544 \begindoublecolumns 5545 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5546 \enddoublecolumns 5547 \fi 5548 \else 5549 \begindoublecolumns 5550 \catcode`\\=0\relax 5551 \catcode`\@=12\relax 5552 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5553 \enddoublecolumns 5554 \fi 5555} 5556 5557% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5558% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5559 5560{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5561\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5562\catcode`\$=3 5563\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5564 % special control sequences used in the index sort key 5565 \let\indexlbrace\{% 5566 \let\indexrbrace\}% 5567 \let\indexatchar\@% 5568 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5569 % 5570 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5571 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5572 % for these characters. 5573 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}} 5574 % 5575 % In case @\ is used for backslash 5576 \uppercase{\let\\=~} 5577 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5578 \catcode`\/=13 5579 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5580 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5581 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5582 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5583 \def\_{% 5584 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5585 \def|{$\vert$}% 5586 \def<{$\less$}% 5587 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5588 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5589}} 5590 5591\def\initial{% 5592 \bgroup 5593 \initialglyphs 5594 \initialx 5595} 5596 5597\def\initialx#1{% 5598 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5599 \removelastskip 5600 % 5601 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5602 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5603 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5604 \nobreak 5605 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5606 \penalty -300 5607 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5608 % 5609 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5610 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5611 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5612 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5613 % 5614 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5615 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5616 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5617 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5618 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5619 % \leftline creates. 5620 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5621 \nobreak 5622 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5623 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5624} 5625 5626\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5627\entryrightmargin=0pt 5628 5629% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5630% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5631% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5632% 5633\def\entry{% 5634 \begingroup 5635 % 5636 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5637 % affect previous text. 5638 \par 5639 % 5640 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5641 \parskip = 0in 5642 % 5643 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5644 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5645 % titles, for instance. 5646 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5647 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5648 % 5649 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5650 \afterassignment\doentry 5651 \let\temp = 5652} 5653\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5654\def\doentry{% 5655 % Save the text of the entry 5656 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5657 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5658 \noindent 5659 \aftergroup\finishentry 5660 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5661 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5662 % with catcodes occurring. 5663} 5664{\catcode`\@=11 5665\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5666 \egroup % end box A 5667 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5668 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5669 \unhbox\boxA 5670 % #1 is the page number. 5671 % 5672 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5673 % leaders if they are present. 5674 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5675 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5676 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5677 \else 5678 % 5679 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5680 % 5681 \ifpdforxetex 5682 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5683 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5684 \else 5685 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5686 \fi 5687 \fi 5688 \egroup % end \boxA 5689 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5690 \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par 5691 \nobreak 5692 \else\bgroup 5693 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5694 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5695 % 5696 \parindent = 0pt 5697 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5698 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5699 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5700 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5701 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5702 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5703 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5704 % 5705 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5706 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5707 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5708 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5709 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5710 \dimen@i=2.1em 5711 \else 5712 \dimen@i=0em 5713 \fi 5714 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5715 % 5716 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5717 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5718 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5719 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5720 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5721 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5722 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5723 % the first line. 5724 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5725 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5726 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5727 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5728 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5729 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5730 \fi 5731 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5732 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5733 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5734 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5735 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5736 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5737 % 5738 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5739 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5740 \advance\parindent by -1em 5741 \fi\fi 5742 \indent % start paragraph 5743 \unhbox\boxA 5744 % 5745 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5746 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5747 % 5748 % Word spacing - no stretch 5749 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5750 % 5751 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5752 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5753 % 5754 \par % format the paragraph 5755 \egroup % The \vbox 5756 \fi 5757 \endgroup 5758}} 5759 5760\newskip\thinshrinkable 5761\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5762 5763% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5764% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5765% the page number to the right. 5766\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5767 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5768 5769 5770\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5771 5772\def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}} 5773\def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}} 5774 5775\def\indententry#1#2#3{% 5776 \bgroup 5777 \leftskip=#1 5778 \entry{#2}{#3}% 5779 \egroup 5780} 5781 5782% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5783% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5784% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5785\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5786 5787\newbox\partialpage 5788\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5789 5790\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5791 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5792 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5793 % 5794 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5795 \output = {% 5796 \savetopmark 5797 % 5798 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5799 % Unvbox the main output page. 5800 \unvbox\PAGE 5801 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5802 }% 5803 }% 5804 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5805 % 5806 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5807 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5808 % 5809 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5810 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5811 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5812 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5813 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5814 % 5815 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5816 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5817 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5818 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5819 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5820 % 5821 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5822 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5823 % been clobbered. 5824 % 5825 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5826 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5827 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5828 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5829 % 5830 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5831 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5832 % previous page. 5833 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5834 \vsize = 2\vsize 5835 % 5836 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5837 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5838} 5839 5840% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5841% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5842% 5843\def\doublecolumnout{% 5844 % 5845 \savetopmark 5846 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5847 \dimen@ = \vsize 5848 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5849 % 5850 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5851 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5852 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5853 \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called 5854 \unvbox\PAGE 5855 \penalty\outputpenalty 5856} 5857% 5858% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5859% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5860\def\pagesofar{% 5861 \unvbox\partialpage 5862 % 5863 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5864 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5865 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5866} 5867 5868 5869% Finished with double columns. 5870\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5871 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5872 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5873 % following situation: 5874 % 5875 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5876 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5877 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5878 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5879 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5880 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5881 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5882 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5883 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5884 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5885 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5886 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5887 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5888 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5889 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5890 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5891 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5892 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5893 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5894 % 5895 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5896 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5897 \penalty0 5898 % 5899 \output = {% 5900 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5901 \savetopmark 5902 \balancecolumns 5903 }% 5904 \eject % call the \output just set 5905 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 5906 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5907 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5908 % definition right away. 5909 \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 5910 % 5911 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5912 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5913 % page break. 5914 \box\balancedcolumns 5915 % 5916 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5917 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5918 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 5919 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 5920 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 5921 \else 5922 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 5923 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 5924 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 5925 \fi 5926} 5927\newbox\balancedcolumns 5928\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5929% 5930% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5931% does the others. 5932\def\balancecolumns{% 5933 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5934 \dimen@ = \ht0 5935 \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip 5936 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5937 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 5938 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5939 \else 5940 % double the leading vertical space 5941 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5942 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5943 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5944 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 5945 \splittopskip = \topskip 5946 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 5947 {% 5948 \vbadness = 10000 5949 \loop 5950 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5951 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5952 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 5953 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5954 \repeat 5955 }% 5956 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 5957 % 5958 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 5959 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 5960 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 5961 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 5962 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 5963 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 5964 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 5965 \doublecolumnout 5966 \else 5967 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 5968 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 5969 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 5970 % flush with each other. 5971 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 5972 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 5973 \else 5974 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 5975 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 5976 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 5977 \fi 5978 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5979 \fi 5980 \fi 5981 % 5982} 5983\catcode`\@ = \other 5984 5985 5986\message{sectioning,} 5987% Chapters, sections, etc. 5988 5989% Let's start with @part. 5990\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 5991\def\partzzz#1{% 5992 \chapoddpage 5993 \null 5994 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 5995 \begingroup 5996 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 5997 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 5998 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 5999 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 6000 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 6001 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 6002 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 6003 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6004 \chapoddpage 6005 \endgroup 6006} 6007 6008% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 6009% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 6010% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 6011% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 6012% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 6013\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 6014\newcount\chapno 6015\newcount\secno \secno=0 6016\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 6017\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 6018 6019% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 6020\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6021% 6022% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6023% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6024% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6025% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6026% 6027\def\appendixletter{% 6028 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6029 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6030 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6031 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6032 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6033 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6034 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6035 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6036 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6037 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6038 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6039 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6040 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6041 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6042 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6043 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6044 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6045 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6046 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6047 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6048 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6049 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6050 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6051 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6052 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6053 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6054 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6055 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6056 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6057 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6058 \else\char\the\appendixno 6059 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6060 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6061 6062% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6063% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6064% these. @section does likewise. 6065\def\thischapter{} 6066\def\thischapternum{} 6067\def\thischaptername{} 6068\def\thissection{} 6069\def\thissectionnum{} 6070\def\thissectionname{} 6071 6072\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6073\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6074 6075% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6076\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6077 6078% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6079\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6080 6081% we only have subsub. 6082\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6083% 6084% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6085% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6086\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6087% 6088% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6089% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6090\def\chapheadtype{N} 6091 6092% Choose a heading macro 6093% #1 is heading type 6094% #2 is heading level 6095% #3 is text for heading 6096\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6097 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6098 \absseclevel=#2 6099 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6100 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6101 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6102 \absseclevel = 0 6103 \else 6104 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6105 \absseclevel = 3 6106 \fi 6107 \fi 6108 % The heading type: 6109 \def\headtype{#1}% 6110 \if \headtype U% 6111 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6112 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6113 \fi 6114 \else 6115 % Check for appendix sections: 6116 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6117 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6118 \else 6119 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6120 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6121 \fi\fi 6122 \fi 6123 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6124 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6125 \def\headtype{U}% 6126 \else 6127 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6128 \fi 6129 \fi 6130 % Now print the heading: 6131 \if \headtype U% 6132 \ifcase\absseclevel 6133 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6134 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6135 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6136 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6137 \fi 6138 \else 6139 \if \headtype A% 6140 \ifcase\absseclevel 6141 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6142 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6143 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6144 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6145 \fi 6146 \else 6147 \ifcase\absseclevel 6148 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6149 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6150 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6151 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6152 \fi 6153 \fi 6154 \fi 6155 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6156} 6157 6158% an interface: 6159\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6160\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6161\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6162 6163% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6164% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6165% 6166% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6167% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6168\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6169% 6170\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6171\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6172 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6173 % as an @include file. 6174 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6175 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6176 % 6177 % Used for \float. 6178 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6179 \resetallfloatnos 6180 % 6181 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6182 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6183 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6184 % 6185 % Write the actual heading. 6186 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6187 % 6188 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6189 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6190 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6191 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6192} 6193 6194\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6195% 6196\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6197 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6198 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6199 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6200 \resetallfloatnos 6201 % 6202 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6203 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6204 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6205 % 6206 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6207 % 6208 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6209 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6210 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6211} 6212 6213% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6214\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6215\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6216 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6217 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6218 % 6219 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6220 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6221 \resetallfloatnos 6222 % 6223 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6224 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6225 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6226 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6227 % to be executed, not expanded). 6228 % 6229 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6230 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6231 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6232 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6233 % the toc entries.) 6234 \toks0 = {#1}% 6235 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6236 % 6237 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6238 % 6239 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6240 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6241 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6242} 6243 6244% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6245\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6246 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6247 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6248 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6249} 6250 6251% @top is like @unnumbered. 6252\let\top\unnumbered 6253 6254% Sections. 6255% 6256\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6257\def\seczzz#1{% 6258 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6259 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6260} 6261 6262% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6263\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6264\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6265 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6266 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6267} 6268\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6269 6270% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6271\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6272\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6273 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6274 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6275} 6276 6277% Subsections. 6278% 6279% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6280\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6281\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6282 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6283 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6284} 6285 6286% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6287\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6288\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6289 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6290 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6291 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6292} 6293 6294% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6295\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6296\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6297 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6298 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6299 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6300} 6301 6302% Subsubsections. 6303% 6304% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6305\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6306\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6307 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6308 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6309 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6310} 6311 6312% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6313\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6314\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6315 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6316 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6317 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6318} 6319 6320% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6321\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6322\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6323 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6324 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6325 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6326} 6327 6328% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6329% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6330% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6331\let\section = \numberedsec 6332\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6333\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6334 6335% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6336 6337\def\majorheading{% 6338 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6339 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6340} 6341 6342\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6343\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6344 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6345 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6346 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6347} 6348 6349% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6350\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6351 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6352\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6353 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6354\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6355 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6356 6357% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6358% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6359% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6360 6361% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6362\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6363 6364% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6365\newskip\chapheadingskip 6366 6367% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6368\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6369 6370% Start a new page 6371\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6372 6373% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6374% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6375% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6376% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6377\def\chapoddpage{% 6378 \chappager 6379 \ifodd\pageno \else 6380 \begingroup 6381 \headingsoff 6382 \null 6383 \chappager 6384 \endgroup 6385 \fi 6386} 6387 6388\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6389 6390\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6391\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6392\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6393\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 6394 6395\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6396\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6397\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6398\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 6399\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6400 6401\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6402\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6403\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6404\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 6405\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6406 6407\CHAPPAGon 6408 6409% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6410% 6411% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6412% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6413% Not used for @heading series. 6414% 6415% To test against our argument. 6416\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6417\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6418\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6419% 6420\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6421 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6422 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6423 \fi 6424 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6425 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6426 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6427 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6428 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6429 % 6430 \def\temptype{#2}% 6431 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6432 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6433 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6434 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6435 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6436 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6437 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6438 \toks0={#1}% 6439 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6440 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6441 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6442 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6443 % commands in some of the translations. 6444 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6445 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6446 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6447 }% 6448 \else 6449 \toks0={#1}% 6450 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6451 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6452 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6453 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6454 % commands in some of the translations. 6455 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6456 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6457 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6458 }% 6459 \fi\fi\fi 6460 % 6461 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6462 % the preceding space. 6463 \safewhatsit\domark 6464 % 6465 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6466 \pchapsepmacro 6467 % 6468 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6469 % between here and the heading. 6470 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6471 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6472 \domark 6473 % 6474 {% 6475 \chapfonts \rm 6476 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6477 % 6478 % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6479 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6480 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6481 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6482 % 6483 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6484 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6485 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6486 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6487 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6488 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6489 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6490 \def\toctype{omit}% 6491 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6492 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6493 \def\toctype{app}% 6494 \else 6495 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6496 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6497 \fi\fi\fi 6498 % 6499 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6500 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6501 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6502 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6503 % 6504 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6505 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6506 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6507 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6508 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6509 \donoderef{#2}% 6510 % 6511 % Typeset the actual heading. 6512 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6513 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6514 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6515 }% 6516 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6517 \nobreak 6518} 6519 6520% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6521\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6522\def\centerparameters{% 6523 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6524 \leftskip = \rightskip 6525 \parfillskip = 0pt 6526} 6527 6528 6529% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6530% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6531% 6532\newskip\secheadingskip 6533\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6534 6535% Subsection titles. 6536\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6537\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6538 6539% Subsubsection titles. 6540\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6541\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6542 6543 6544% Print any size, any type, section title. 6545% 6546% #1 is the text of the title, 6547% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6548% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6549% #4 is the section number. 6550% 6551\def\seckeyword{sec} 6552% 6553\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6554 {% 6555 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6556 \def\temptype{#3}% 6557 % 6558 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6559 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6560 % dubious), but not the others. 6561 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6562 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6563 \fi 6564 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6565 % 6566 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6567 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6568 % 6569 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6570 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6571 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6572 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6573 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6574 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6575 \fi 6576 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6577 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6578 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6579 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6580 \toks0={#1}% 6581 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6582 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6583 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6584 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6585 % commands in some of the translations. 6586 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6587 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6588 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6589 }% 6590 \fi 6591 \else 6592 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6593 \toks0={#1}% 6594 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6595 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6596 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6597 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6598 % commands in some of the translations. 6599 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6600 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6601 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6602 }% 6603 \fi 6604 \fi\fi\fi 6605 % 6606 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6607 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6608 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6609 \par 6610 % 6611 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6612 % the preceding space. 6613 \safewhatsit\domark 6614 % 6615 % Insert space above the heading. 6616 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6617 % 6618 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6619 % between here and the heading. 6620 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6621 \domark 6622 % 6623 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6624 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6625 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6626 \def\toctype{unn}% 6627 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6628 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6629 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6630 % and don't redefine \currentsection. 6631 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6632 \def\toctype{omit}% 6633 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6634 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6635 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6636 \def\toctype{app}% 6637 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6638 \else 6639 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6640 \def\toctype{num}% 6641 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6642 \fi\fi\fi 6643 % 6644 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6645 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6646 % 6647 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6648 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6649 \donoderef{#3}% 6650 % 6651 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6652 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6653 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6654 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6655 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6656 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6657 \nobreak 6658 % 6659 % Output the actual section heading. 6660 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6661 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6662 \unhbox0 #1}% 6663 }% 6664 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6665 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6666 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6667 % 6668 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6669 % was followed by glue. 6670 \nobreak 6671 % 6672 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6673 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6674 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6675 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6676 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6677 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6678 \vskip-\parskip 6679 % 6680 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6681 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6682 % and do the needful. 6683 \penalty 10001 6684} 6685 6686 6687\message{toc,} 6688% Table of contents. 6689\newwrite\tocfile 6690 6691% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6692% Called from @chapter, etc. 6693% 6694% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6695% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6696% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6697% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6698% destination to jump to. 6699% 6700% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6701% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6702% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6703% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6704% 6705\newif\iftocfileopened 6706\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6707% 6708\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6709 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6710 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6711 \iftocfileopened\else 6712 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6713 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6714 \fi 6715 % 6716 \iflinks 6717 {\atdummies 6718 \edef\temp{% 6719 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6720 \temp 6721 }% 6722 \fi 6723 \fi 6724 % 6725 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6726 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6727 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6728 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6729 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6730 % `1', and two named `2'. 6731 \ifpdforxetex 6732 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6733 \fi 6734} 6735 6736 6737% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6738% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6739% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6740% 6741\def\activecatcodes{% 6742 \catcode`\"=\active 6743 \catcode`\$=\active 6744 \catcode`\<=\active 6745 \catcode`\>=\active 6746 \catcode`\\=\active 6747 \catcode`\^=\active 6748 \catcode`\_=\active 6749 \catcode`\|=\active 6750 \catcode`\~=\active 6751} 6752 6753 6754% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6755\def\readtocfile{% 6756 \setupdatafile 6757 \activecatcodes 6758 \input \tocreadfilename 6759} 6760 6761\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6762\newcount\savepageno 6763\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6764 6765% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6766% 6767\def\startcontents#1{% 6768 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6769 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6770 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6771 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 6772 \contentsalignmacro 6773 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6774 % 6775 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6776 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6777 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6778 % 6779 \savepageno = \pageno 6780 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6781 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6782 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6783 % 6784 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6785 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6786} 6787 6788% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6789% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6790% 6791\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6792 6793% Normal (long) toc. 6794% 6795\def\contents{% 6796 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6797 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6798 \ifeof 1 \else 6799 \readtocfile 6800 \fi 6801 \vfill \eject 6802 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6803 \ifeof 1 \else 6804 \pdfmakeoutlines 6805 \fi 6806 \closein 1 6807 \endgroup 6808 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6809 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6810} 6811 6812% And just the chapters. 6813\def\summarycontents{% 6814 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6815 % 6816 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6817 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6818 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6819 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6820 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6821 \secfonts 6822 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6823 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6824 \rm 6825 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6826 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6827 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6828 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6829 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6830 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6831 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6832 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6833 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6834 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6835 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6836 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6837 \ifeof 1 \else 6838 \readtocfile 6839 \fi 6840 \closein 1 6841 \vfill \eject 6842 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6843 \endgroup 6844 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6845 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6846} 6847\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6848 6849% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6850% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6851% 6852\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6853 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6854 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6855 % But use \hss just in case. 6856 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6857 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6858 % 6859 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6860 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6861 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6862 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6863 % there are before deciding ... 6864 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6865} 6866 6867% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6868% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6869% The last argument is the page number. 6870% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6871 6872% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6873% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6874% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6875\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6876\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6877 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6878 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6879 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6880 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6881 \penalty-300 6882 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6883 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6884} 6885% 6886% Parts, in the short toc. 6887\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6888 \penalty-300 6889 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6890 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6891} 6892 6893% Chapters, in the main contents. 6894\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6895 6896% Chapters, in the short toc. 6897% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6898\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6899 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6900} 6901 6902% Appendices, in the main contents. 6903% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6904% 6905\def\appendixbox#1{% 6906 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6907 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6908 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6909% 6910\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6911 6912% Unnumbered chapters. 6913\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6914\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6915 6916% Sections. 6917\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6918\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6919\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6920 6921% Subsections. 6922\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6923\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6924\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6925 6926% And subsubsections. 6927\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6928\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6929\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6930 6931% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6932% Same as \defaultparindent. 6933\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6934 6935% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6936% page number. 6937% 6938% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6939% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6940\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6941 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6942 \begingroup 6943 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 6944 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 6945 \chapentryfonts 6946 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6947 \endgroup 6948 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 6949} 6950 6951\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6952 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 6953 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6954\endgroup} 6955 6956\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6957 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 6958 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6959\endgroup} 6960 6961\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6962 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 6963 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6964\endgroup} 6965 6966% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 6967\let\tocentry = \entry 6968 6969% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 6970\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 6971 6972\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6973\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6974 6975\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 6976\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 6977\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6978\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6979 6980 6981\message{environments,} 6982% @foo ... @end foo. 6983 6984% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 6985% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 6986% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 6987 6988\envdef\tex{% 6989 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 6990 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 6991 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 6992 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 6993 \catcode `\%=14 6994 \catcode `\+=\other 6995 \catcode `\"=\other 6996 \catcode `\|=\other 6997 \catcode `\<=\other 6998 \catcode `\>=\other 6999 \catcode `\`=\other 7000 \catcode `\'=\other 7001 % 7002 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 7003 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 7004 \mathactive 7005 % 7006 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 7007 \let\b=\ptexb 7008 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 7009 \let\c=\ptexc 7010 \let\,=\ptexcomma 7011 \let\.=\ptexdot 7012 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7013 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7014 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7015 \let\i=\ptexi 7016 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7017 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7018 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7019 \let\+=\tabalign 7020 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7021 \let\/=\ptexslash 7022 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7023 \let\*=\ptexstar 7024 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7025 \let\t=\ptext 7026 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7027 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7028 % 7029 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7030 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7031 \def\@{@}% 7032} 7033% There is no need to define \Etex. 7034 7035% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7036% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7037% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7038 7039% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7040\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7041 7042% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7043% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7044% have any width. 7045\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7046 7047% This space is always present above and below environments. 7048\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7049 7050% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7051% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7052% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7053% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7054% 7055\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7056 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7057 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7058 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7059 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7060 \endgraf 7061 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7062 \removelastskip 7063 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7064 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7065 % often leads into it. 7066 \penalty100 7067 \fi 7068 \vskip\envskipamount 7069 \fi 7070 \fi 7071}} 7072 7073\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7074 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7075 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7076 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7077 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7078 \endgraf 7079 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7080 \removelastskip 7081 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7082 % or better ... 7083 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7084 \vskip\envskipamount 7085 \fi 7086 \fi 7087}} 7088 7089% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7090% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7091\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7092 7093% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7094% environment contents. 7095 7096% 7097\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7098\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7099\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7100\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7101\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7102 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7103 \hskip\rskip}} 7104\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7105 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7106 \hskip\rskip}} 7107% 7108\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7109 7110% only require the font if @cartouche is actually used 7111\def\cartouchefontdefs{% 7112 \font\circle=lcircle10\relax 7113 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7114} 7115\newdimen\circthick 7116\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7117\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7118 7119 7120\envdef\cartouche{% 7121 \cartouchefontdefs 7122 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7123 \startsavinginserts 7124 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7125 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7126 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7127 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7128 \cartouter=\hsize 7129 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7130 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7131 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7132 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7133 % 7134 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7135 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7136 % collide with the section heading. 7137 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7138 % 7139 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7140 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7141 \carttop 7142 \hbox\bgroup 7143 \hskip\lskip 7144 \vrule\kern3pt 7145 \vbox\bgroup 7146 \kern3pt 7147 \hsize=\cartinner 7148 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7149 \lineskip=\normlskip 7150 \parskip=\normpskip 7151 \vskip -\parskip 7152 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7153} 7154\def\Ecartouche{% 7155 \ifhmode\par\fi 7156 \kern3pt 7157 \egroup 7158 \kern3pt\vrule 7159 \hskip\rskip 7160 \egroup 7161 \cartbot 7162 \egroup 7163 \addgroupbox 7164 \checkinserts 7165} 7166 7167 7168% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7169% inside a group. 7170\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7171\def\nonfillstart{% 7172 \aboveenvbreak 7173 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7174 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7175 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7176 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7177 \parskip = 0pt 7178 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7179 % the normal \indent. 7180 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7181 \parindent = 0pt 7182 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7183 % 7184 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7185 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7186 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7187 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7188 \else 7189 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7190 \fi 7191 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7192} 7193 7194\begingroup 7195\obeyspaces 7196% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7197% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7198% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7199% @indent. 7200\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7201\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7202\ifx\temp % 7203\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7204\else% 7205\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7206\fi% 7207}% 7208\endgroup 7209\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7210\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7211 7212% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7213% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7214% This affects the following displayed environments: 7215% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 7216% 7217\def\smallword{small} 7218\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7219\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7220\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7221 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7222 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7223 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7224 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7225 % to change the fonts afterward. 7226 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7227 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7228 \fi 7229} 7230\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7231 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7232 \else 7233 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7234 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7235 \fi 7236} 7237 7238% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7239% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7240\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7241 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7242 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7243 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7244 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7245} 7246 7247% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7248\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7249 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7250 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7251} 7252% 7253% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7254% @example: same as @lisp. 7255% 7256% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7257% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7258% 7259\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7260 \nonfillstart 7261 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 7262 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7263 \gobble % eat return 7264} 7265% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7266% 7267\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7268 \nonfillstart 7269 \gobble 7270} 7271 7272% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7273% 7274\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7275 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7276 \nonfillstart 7277 \gobble 7278} 7279 7280% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7281\envdef\flushleft{% 7282 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7283 \nonfillstart 7284 \gobble 7285} 7286\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7287 7288% @flushright. 7289% 7290\envdef\flushright{% 7291 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7292 \nonfillstart 7293 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7294 \gobble 7295} 7296\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7297 7298 7299% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7300% justification. From plain.tex. 7301\envdef\raggedright{% 7302 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7303} 7304\let\Eraggedright\par 7305 7306\envdef\raggedleft{% 7307 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7308 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7309 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7310 % badness reporting. 7311} 7312\let\Eraggedleft\par 7313 7314\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7315 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7316 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7317 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7318 % badness reporting. 7319} 7320\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7321 7322 7323% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7324% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7325% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7326% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7327% 7328\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7329% 7330\def\quotationstart{% 7331 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7332 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7333 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7334 \fi 7335 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7336} 7337 7338% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7339% doing normal filling. 7340% 7341\def\Equotation{% 7342 \par 7343 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7344 % indent a bit. 7345 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7346 \fi 7347 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7348} 7349\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7350 7351% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7352\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7353 \def\temp{#1}% 7354 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7355 {\bf #1: }% 7356 \fi 7357} 7358 7359% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7360% has no optional argument. 7361% 7362\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7363% 7364\def\indentedblockstart{% 7365 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7366 \parindent=0pt 7367 % 7368 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7369 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7370 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7371 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7372 \else 7373 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7374 \fi 7375} 7376 7377% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7378% 7379\def\Eindentedblock{% 7380 \par 7381 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7382} 7383\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7384 7385 7386% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7387% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7388% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7389% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7390% 7391% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7392% 7393% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7394% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7395% verbatim line. 7396\def\dospecials{% 7397 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7398 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7399 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7400 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7401 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7402 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7403 %\do\`\do\'% 7404} 7405% 7406% [Knuth] p. 380 7407\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7408 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7409% 7410% Setup for the @verb command. 7411% 7412% Eight spaces for a tab 7413\begingroup 7414 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7415 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7416\endgroup 7417% 7418\def\setupverb{% 7419 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7420 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7421 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 7422 \tabeightspaces 7423 % Respect line breaks, 7424 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7425 % make each space count 7426 % must do in this order: 7427 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7428} 7429 7430% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7431% 7432% Real tab expansion. 7433\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7434% 7435% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7436% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 7437% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 7438% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 7439% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 7440% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 7441\newbox\verbbox 7442\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7443% 7444\begingroup 7445 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7446 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7447 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7448 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7449 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7450 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7451 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7452 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7453 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 7454 }% 7455 } 7456\endgroup 7457 7458% start the verbatim environment. 7459\def\setupverbatim{% 7460 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7461 \nonfillstart 7462 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7463 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 7464 % never \starttabbox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 7465 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 7466 \tabexpand 7467 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 7468 % Respect line breaks, 7469 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7470 % make each space count. 7471 % Must do in this order: 7472 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7473 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 7474} 7475 7476% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7477% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7478% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7479% 7480% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7481% 7482% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7483\begingroup 7484 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7485 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7486\endgroup 7487% 7488\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7489% 7490% 7491% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7492% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7493% 7494% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7495% 7496% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7497% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7498% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7499% 7500% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7501% 7502\begingroup 7503 \catcode`\ =\active 7504 \obeylines % 7505 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7506 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7507 % line in the output. 7508 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7509 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7510 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7511\endgroup 7512% 7513\envdef\verbatim{% 7514 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 7515} 7516\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7517 7518 7519% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7520% 7521\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7522% 7523\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7524 {% 7525 \makevalueexpandable 7526 \setupverbatim 7527 {% 7528 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7529 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7530 \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 } 7531 \expandafter 7532 }\tmp 7533 \afterenvbreak 7534 }% 7535} 7536 7537% @copying ... @end copying. 7538% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7539% 7540% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7541% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7542% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7543% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7544% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7545% possible is desirable. 7546% 7547\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7548\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7549% 7550\def\insertcopying{% 7551 \begingroup 7552 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7553 \scanexp\copyingtext 7554 \endgroup 7555} 7556 7557 7558\message{defuns,} 7559% @defun etc. 7560 7561\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7562\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7563\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7564\newcount\defunpenalty 7565 7566% Start the processing of @deffn: 7567\def\startdefun{% 7568 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7569 \medbreak 7570 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7571 % following @def command, see below. 7572 \else 7573 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7574 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7575 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7576 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7577 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7578 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7579 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7580 % 7581 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7582 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7583 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7584 % @def command. 7585 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7586 % 7587 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7588 % But do insert the glue. 7589 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7590 \fi 7591 % 7592 \parindent=0in 7593 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7594 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7595} 7596 7597\def\dodefunx#1{% 7598 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7599 \checkenv#1% 7600 % 7601 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7602 % It's not a great place, though. 7603 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7604 % 7605 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7606 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7607} 7608\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7609 7610% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7611% 7612\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7613 \begingroup 7614 % call \deffnheader: 7615 #1#2 \endheader 7616 % common ending: 7617 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7618 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7619 \endgraf 7620 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7621 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7622 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7623 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7624 \checkparencounts 7625 \endgroup 7626} 7627 7628\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7629 7630% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7631% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7632% 7633\def\makedefun#1{% 7634 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7635 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7636 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7637 \temp 7638} 7639 7640% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7641% 7642% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7643% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7644% 7645\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7646 \envdef#1{% 7647 \startdefun 7648 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7649 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7650 }% 7651 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7652 \def#3% 7653} 7654 7655\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7656\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7657 7658% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7659% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7660% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7661% 7662\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7663 \def\temp{#1}% 7664 \ifx\temp\onword 7665 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7666 = \empty 7667 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7668 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7669 = \relax 7670 \else 7671 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7672 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7673 must be on|off}% 7674 \fi\fi 7675} 7676 7677% \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 7678% 7679% If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind. 7680% (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an 7681% index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in 7682% behaviour though.) 7683\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 7684 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 7685 \ifx\thirdarg\empty 7686 \doind{#1}{#2}% 7687 \else 7688 \doind{#1}{#2\space#3}% 7689 \fi 7690} 7691 7692% Untyped functions: 7693 7694% @deffn category name args 7695\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7696 7697% @deffn category class name args 7698\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7699 7700% \defopon {category on}class name args 7701\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7702 7703% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7704% 7705\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7706 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7707 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7708} 7709 7710% Typed functions: 7711 7712% @deftypefn category type name args 7713\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7714 7715% @deftypeop category class type name args 7716\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7717 7718% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7719\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7720 7721% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7722% 7723\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7724 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7725 \doingtypefntrue 7726 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7727} 7728 7729% Typed variables: 7730 7731% @deftypevr category type var args 7732\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7733 7734% @deftypecv category class type var args 7735\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7736 7737% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7738\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7739 7740% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7741% 7742\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7743 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7744 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7745} 7746 7747% Untyped variables: 7748 7749% @defvr category var args 7750\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7751 7752% @defcv category class var args 7753\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7754 7755% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7756\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7757 7758% Types: 7759 7760% @deftp category name args 7761\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7762 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7763 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7764} 7765 7766% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7767\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7768\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7769\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7770\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7771\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7772\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7773\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7774\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7775\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7776\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7777\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7778 7779% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7780% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7781% #2 is the return type, if any. 7782% #3 is the function name. 7783% 7784% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7785% 7786\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7787 \par 7788 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7789 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7790 % 7791 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7792 % on a line by itself. 7793 \rettypeownlinefalse 7794 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7795 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7796 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7797 \rettypeownlinetrue 7798 \fi 7799 \fi 7800 % 7801 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7802 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7803 % just below it. 7804 \def\temp{#1}% 7805 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7806 % 7807 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7808 % least two. 7809 \tempnum = 2 7810 % 7811 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7812 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7813 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7814 % 7815 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7816 \ifrettypeownline 7817 \advance\tempnum by 1 7818 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7819 \else 7820 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7821 \fi 7822 % 7823 % The continuations: 7824 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7825 % 7826 % The final paragraph shape: 7827 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7828 % 7829 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7830 \noindent 7831 \hbox to 0pt{% 7832 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7833 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7834 \kern\leftskip 7835 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7836 }% 7837 % 7838 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7839 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7840 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7841 {% 7842 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7843 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7844 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7845 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7846 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7847 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7848 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7849 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7850 \df \tt 7851 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7852 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7853 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7854 \ifrettypeownline 7855 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7856 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7857 \else 7858 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7859 \fi 7860 \fi % no return type 7861 #3% output function name 7862 }% 7863 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7864 % 7865 \boldbrax 7866 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7867} 7868 7869% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7870% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7871% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7872% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7873% 7874\def\defunargs#1{% 7875 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7876 % tt for the names. 7877 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7878 % 7879 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7880 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7881 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7882 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7883 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7884 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7885 #1% 7886 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7887} 7888 7889% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7890% 7891\def\activeparens{% 7892 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7893 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7894 \catcode`\&=\active 7895} 7896 7897% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7898\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7899 7900% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7901% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7902% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7903{ 7904 \activeparens 7905 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7906 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7907 \global\let& = \& 7908 7909 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7910 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7911} 7912\let\ampchar\& 7913 7914\newcount\parencount 7915 7916% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7917\newif\ifampseen 7918\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7919 7920\def\parenfont{% 7921 \ifampseen 7922 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7923 % otherwise use the default font. 7924 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7925 \else 7926 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7927 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7928 \sf 7929 \fi 7930} 7931\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7932 \ifampseen 7933 \ifnum\parencount=1 7934 #1% 7935 \fi 7936 \fi 7937} 7938\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7939 7940\def\opnr{% 7941 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7942 {\parenfont(}% 7943 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7944} 7945\def\clnr{% 7946 {\parenfont)}% 7947 \infirstlevel \sl 7948 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7949} 7950 7951\newcount\brackcount 7952\def\lbrb{% 7953 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7954 {\bf[}% 7955} 7956\def\rbrb{% 7957 {\bf]}% 7958 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7959} 7960 7961\def\checkparencounts{% 7962 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7963 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 7964} 7965% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 7966% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 7967\def\badparencount{% 7968 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 7969 \global\parencount=0 7970} 7971\def\badbrackcount{% 7972 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 7973 \global\brackcount=0 7974} 7975 7976 7977\message{macros,} 7978% @macro. 7979 7980% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 7981% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 7982\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7983 \newwrite\macscribble 7984 \def\scantokens#1{% 7985 \toks0={#1}% 7986 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 7987 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 7988 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 7989 \input \jobname.tmp 7990 } 7991\fi 7992 7993% Used at the time of macro expansion. 7994% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 7995\def\scanmacro#1{% 7996 \newlinechar`\^^M 7997 \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% 7998 % 7999 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 8000 \scantokens{#1@comment}% 8001 % 8002 % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 8003 % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla 8004 % in math mode. 8005} 8006 8007% Used for copying and captions 8008\def\scanexp#1{% 8009 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8010} 8011 8012\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8013\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8014\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8015 8016% List of all defined macros in the form 8017% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8018% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8019% if there is a need. 8020\def\macrolist{} 8021 8022% Add the macro to \macrolist 8023\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8024\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8025 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8026 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8027} 8028 8029% Utility routines. 8030% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8031% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8032% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8033% 8034\def\cslet#1#2{% 8035 \expandafter\let 8036 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8037 \csname#2\endcsname 8038} 8039 8040% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8041% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8042{\catcode`\@=11 8043\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8044\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8045\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8046\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8047\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8048} 8049 8050% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8051{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8052\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8053\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8054\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8055} 8056 8057% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8058% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8059% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8060% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8061% 8062% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8063% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8064% confine the change to the current group. 8065% 8066% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8067% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8068% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8069% 8070\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8071 \catcode`\"=\other 8072 \catcode`\+=\other 8073 \catcode`\<=\other 8074 \catcode`\>=\other 8075 \catcode`\^=\other 8076 \catcode`\_=\other 8077 \catcode`\|=\other 8078 \catcode`\~=\other 8079 \passthroughcharstrue 8080} 8081 8082\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8083 \scanctxt 8084 \catcode`\@=\other 8085 \catcode`\\=\other 8086 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8087} 8088 8089\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8090 \scanctxt 8091 \catcode`\ =\other 8092 \catcode`\@=\other 8093 \catcode`\{=\other 8094 \catcode`\}=\other 8095 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8096 \usembodybackslash 8097} 8098 8099% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8100% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8101% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8102\def\macroargctxt{% 8103 \scanctxt 8104 \catcode`\ =\active 8105 \catcode`\@=\other 8106 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8107 \catcode`\\=\active 8108} 8109 8110\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8111 \scanctxt 8112 \catcode`\@=\other 8113 \catcode`\{=\other 8114 \catcode`\}=\other 8115} 8116 8117% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8118% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8119% where N is the macro parameter number. 8120% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8121% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8122% 8123{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8124 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8125 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8126} 8127\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8128 8129\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8130 8131\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8132\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8133 8134\def\macroxxx#1{% 8135 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8136 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8137 \paramno=0\relax 8138 \else 8139 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8140 \if\paramno>256\relax 8141 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8142 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8143 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8144 \fi 8145 \fi 8146 \fi 8147 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8148 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8149 \else 8150 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8151 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8152 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8153 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8154 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8155 \fi 8156 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8157 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8158 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8159 \fi} 8160 8161\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8162 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8163 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8164 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8165 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8166 \begingroup 8167 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8168 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8169 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8170 \endgroup 8171 \else 8172 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8173 \fi 8174} 8175 8176% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8177% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8178% 8179\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8180 \ifx #1\relax 8181 % remove this 8182 \else 8183 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8184 \fi 8185} 8186 8187% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8188% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8189\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8190\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8191\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8192\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8193% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8194% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8195% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8196 8197% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8198% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8199% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8200% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8201% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8202% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8203% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8204% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8205% 8206% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8207% 8208% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8209% \parsemmanyargdef. 8210% 8211\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8212 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8213 \let\hash\relax 8214 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8215 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8216 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8217 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8218 \paramno0\relax 8219 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8220 \fi 8221} 8222\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8223 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8224 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8225 \advance\paramno by 1 8226 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8227 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 8228 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8229 \fi\next} 8230 8231% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8232% 8233% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8234% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8235% 8236% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8237% body to be transformed. 8238% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8239% 8240{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8241\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8242{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8243\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8244 8245% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8246\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8247\catcode `@=11\relax 8248 8249%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8250 8251% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8252% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8253% processed again to replace the arguments. 8254% 8255% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8256% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8257% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8258% 8259% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8260% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8261% 8262% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8263% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8264% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8265% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8266% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8267% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8268\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8269 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8270 \else 8271 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8272 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8273 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8274 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8275 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8276 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8277 % \xdef . 8278 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8279 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8280 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8281 \fi\next} 8282 8283 8284\let\endargs@\relax 8285\let\nil@\relax 8286\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8287\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8288 8289% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8290% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8291% macarg.ARGNAME 8292% 8293% #1 is the macro name 8294% #2 is the list of argument names 8295% #3 is the list of argument values 8296\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8297 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8298 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8299 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8300 \def\macroname{#1}% 8301 \begingroup 8302 \macroargctxt 8303 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8304 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8305 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8306 \setemptyargvalues@ 8307 \else 8308 \getargvals@@ 8309 \fi 8310} 8311\def\getargvals@@{% 8312 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8313 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8314 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8315 \else 8316 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8317 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8318 \fi 8319 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8320 \else 8321 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8322 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8323 % macros to empty. 8324 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8325 \else 8326 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8327 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8328 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8329 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8330 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8331 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8332 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8333 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8334 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8335 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8336 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8337 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8338 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8339 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8340 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8341 \fi 8342 \fi 8343 \next 8344} 8345 8346\def\push@#1#2{% 8347 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8348 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8349 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8350 \expandafter#1#2}% 8351} 8352 8353% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8354% in macro \@tempa. 8355% 8356\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8357 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8358 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8359 % values into respective token registers. 8360 % 8361 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8362 \begingroup 8363 \paramno0\relax 8364 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8365 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8366 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8367 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8368 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8369 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8370 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8371 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8372 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8373 % group. 8374 \expandafter 8375 \endgroup 8376 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8377 } 8378 8379% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8380% 8381\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8382 \expandafter 8383 \endgroup 8384 \macargdeflist@ 8385 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8386 % is in \@tempa . 8387 \macvalstoargs@ 8388 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8389 % with \@tempb . 8390 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8391 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8392 % \egroup . 8393 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8394 \let\@tempc\relax 8395 \else 8396 \let\@tempc\egroup 8397 \fi 8398 % And now we do the real job: 8399 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8400 \@tempd 8401} 8402 8403\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8404 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8405 \else 8406 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8407 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8408 % alias \@tempb . 8409 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8410 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8411 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8412 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8413 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8414 \fi 8415 \next 8416} 8417 8418% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8419% 8420\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8421 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8422 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8423 \else 8424 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8425 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8426 \fi 8427 \next 8428} 8429 8430\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8431 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8432 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8433 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8434 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8435} 8436 8437% #1 is the element target macro 8438% #2 is the list macro 8439% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8440\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8441 \def#1{#3}% 8442 \def#2{#4}% 8443} 8444\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8445 \long\def#1{#3}% 8446 \long\def#2{#4}% 8447} 8448 8449 8450%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8451 8452 8453% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8454% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8455% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8456% \paramno is the number of parameters 8457% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8458% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8459% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8460% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8461% 8462\def\defmacro{% 8463 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8464 \ifnum\paramno=1 8465 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8466 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8467 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8468 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8469 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8470 \else 8471 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8472 \fi 8473 \ifcase\paramno 8474 % 0 8475 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8476 \bgroup 8477 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8478 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8479 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8480 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8481 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8482 \egroup 8483 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8484 \or % 1 8485 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8486 \bgroup 8487 \noexpand\braceorline 8488 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8489 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8490 \egroup 8491 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8492 }% 8493 \else % at most 9 8494 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8495 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8496 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8497 % comma. 8498 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8499 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8500 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8501 \bgroup 8502 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8503 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8504 \noexpand\expandafter 8505 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8506 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8507 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8508 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8509 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8510 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8511 \expandafter\expandafter 8512 \expandafter\xdef 8513 \expandafter\expandafter 8514 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8515 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8516 \else % 10 or more: 8517 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8518 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8519 }% 8520 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8521 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8522 \fi 8523 \fi} 8524 8525\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8526 8527\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8528 8529 8530%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8531% 8532{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8533@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8534@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8535 8536% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8537% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8538% compressed to one. 8539% 8540% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8541% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8542% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8543% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8544% 8545% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8546% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8547% 8548% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8549% 8550% where: 8551% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8552% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8553% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8554% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8555 8556@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8557 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8558} 8559@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8560 8561% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8562% #2 - PENDING_BS 8563% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8564% #4 used to look ahead 8565% 8566% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8567% otherwise, remove the next token. 8568@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8569 @ifx#4\% 8570 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8571 @else 8572 @expandafter@add_segment 8573 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8574} 8575 8576% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8577% #2 - PENDING_BS 8578% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8579% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8580% #5 looks ahead 8581% 8582% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8583@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8584 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8585} 8586 8587@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8588 8589% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8590% #2 - PENDING_BS 8591% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8592% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8593% 8594% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8595% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8596% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8597% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8598% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8599% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8600% added to ARG_RESULT. 8601@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8602@ifx#3@_finish 8603 @call_the_macro#1!% 8604@else 8605 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8606 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8607 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8608 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8609 % long #4 is. 8610} 8611 8612% #1 - THE_MACRO 8613% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8614% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8615% conditional. 8616@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8617 8618} 8619%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8620 8621% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8622% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8623% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8624% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8625% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8626% 8627\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8628\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8629 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8630 \macroargctxt 8631 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8632 \else 8633 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8634 \fi \macnamexxx} 8635 8636 8637% @alias. 8638% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8639% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8640% 8641\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8642\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8643\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8644 {% 8645 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8646 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8647 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8648 }% 8649 \next 8650} 8651 8652 8653\message{cross references,} 8654 8655\newwrite\auxfile 8656\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8657\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8658 8659% @inforef is relatively simple. 8660\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8661\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8662 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8663 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8664 8665% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8666% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8667% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8668% @node foo , bar , ... 8669% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8670% 8671\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8672% 8673% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8674% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8675\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8676\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode} 8677 8678% Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex 8679% conditional. 8680% \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need 8681% that here. 8682\def\omittopnode{% 8683 \ifx\lastnode\wordTop 8684 \expandafter\ignorenode\fi 8685} 8686\def\wordTop{Top} 8687 8688% Until the next @node or @bye command, divert output to a box that is not 8689% output. 8690\def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup\def\node{\egroup\node}% 8691\ignorenodebye 8692} 8693 8694{\let\bye\relax 8695\gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef} 8696\gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}} 8697% The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer 8698 8699\let\lastnode=\empty 8700 8701% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8702% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8703% 8704\def\donoderef#1{% 8705 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8706 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8707 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8708 \fi 8709} 8710 8711% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8712% 8713\newcount\savesfregister 8714% 8715\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8716\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8717\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8718 8719% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8720% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8721% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection, 8722% or the anchor name. 8723% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8724% empty for anchors. 8725% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8726% 8727% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8728% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8729% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8730% 8731\def\setref#1#2{% 8732 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8733 \iflinks 8734 {% 8735 \requireauxfile 8736 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8737 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8738 \def\value##1{##1}% 8739 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8740 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8741 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8742 }% 8743 \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}% 8744 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8745 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8746 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8747 }% 8748 \fi 8749} 8750 8751% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8752% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8753% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8754% variable, now it's official. 8755% 8756\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8757 \def\temp{#1}% 8758 \ifx\temp\onword 8759 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8760 = \empty 8761 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8762 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8763 = \relax 8764 \else 8765 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8766 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8767 must be on|off}% 8768 \fi\fi 8769} 8770 8771% 8772% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8773% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8774% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8775% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8776% 8777\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8778\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8779\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8780 8781\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8782\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8783% 8784\newbox\toprefbox 8785\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8786\newbox\infofilenamebox 8787\newbox\printedmanualbox 8788% 8789\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8790 \unsepspaces 8791 % 8792 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8793 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8794 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8795 % 8796 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8797 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8798 % 8799 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8800 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8801 % 8802 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8803 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8804 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8805 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8806 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8807 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8808 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8809 \else 8810 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8811 % the square brackets if we have it. 8812 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8813 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8814 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8815 \else 8816 \ifhavexrefs 8817 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8818 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8819 \else 8820 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8821 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8822 \fi% 8823 \fi 8824 \fi 8825 \fi 8826 % 8827 % Make link in pdf output. 8828 \ifpdf 8829 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8830 {\indexnofonts 8831 \makevalueexpandable 8832 \turnoffactive 8833 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8834 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8835 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8836 \getfilename{#4}% 8837 % 8838 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8839 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8840 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8841 % 8842 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8843 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8844 \fi 8845 % 8846 \leavevmode 8847 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8848 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8849 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8850 \else 8851 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8852 \fi 8853 }% 8854 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8855 \else 8856 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8857 \else 8858 % For XeTeX 8859 {\indexnofonts 8860 \makevalueexpandable 8861 \turnoffactive 8862 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8863 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8864 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8865 \getfilename{#4}% 8866 % 8867 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8868 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8869 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8870 % 8871 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8872 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8873 \fi 8874 % 8875 \leavevmode 8876 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8877 % With default settings, 8878 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8879 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8880 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8881 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8882 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8883 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8884 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8885 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8886 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8887 \else 8888 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8889 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8890 \fi 8891 }% 8892 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8893 \fi 8894 \fi 8895 {% 8896 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8897 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8898 \indexnofonts 8899 \turnoffactive 8900 \def\value##1{##1}% 8901 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8902 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8903 }% 8904 % 8905 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8906 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8907 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8908 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8909 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8910 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8911 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8912 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 8913 \else 8914 \printedrefname 8915 \fi 8916 % 8917 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8918 % "in MANUALNAME". 8919 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8920 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8921 \fi 8922 \else 8923 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8924 % 8925 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8926 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8927 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8928 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8929 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8930 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8931 % 8932 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8933 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8934 % 8935 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8936 % 8937 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8938 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8939 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8940 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8941 % 8942 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8943 % 8944 \else 8945 % Reference within this manual. 8946 % 8947 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 8948 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 8949 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 8950 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 8951 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 8952 {\turnoffactive 8953 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 8954 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 8955 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 8956 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8957 }% 8958 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8959 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8960 % 8961 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8962 ,\space 8963 % 8964 % output the `page 3'. 8965 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 8966 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 8967 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 8968 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 8969 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 8970 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 8971 \else\ifx\ 8972 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 8973 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 8974 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 8975 \fi\fi 8976 \fi 8977 \endlink 8978\endgroup} 8979 8980% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 8981% 8982% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 8983% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 8984% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 8985% 8986% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 8987% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 8988% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 8989% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 8990% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 8991% 8992% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 8993% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 8994% 8995\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 8996 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 8997 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 8998 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 8999 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 9000 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 9001 \fi 9002 \fi 9003 #1% 9004} 9005 9006% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9007% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9008% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9009% one that Bob is working on :). 9010% 9011\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9012 9013% Things referred to by \setref. 9014% 9015\def\Ynothing{} 9016\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9017\def\Ynumbered{% 9018 \ifnum\secno=0 9019 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9020 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9021 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9022 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9023 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9024 \else 9025 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9026 \fi\fi\fi 9027} 9028\def\Yappendix{% 9029 \ifnum\secno=0 9030 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9031 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9032 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9033 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9034 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9035 \else 9036 \putwordSection@tie 9037 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9038 \fi\fi\fi 9039} 9040 9041% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX 9042% is output afterwards if non-empty. 9043\def\refx#1#2{% 9044 \requireauxfile 9045 {% 9046 \indexnofonts 9047 \otherbackslash 9048 \def\value##1{##1}% 9049 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9050 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9051 }% 9052 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9053 % If not defined, say something at least. 9054 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9055 \iflinks 9056 \ifhavexrefs 9057 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9058 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9059 \else 9060 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9061 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9062 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9063 \fi 9064 \fi 9065 \fi 9066 \else 9067 % It's defined, so just use it. 9068 \thisrefX 9069 \fi 9070 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 9071} 9072 9073% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9074% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9075% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9076% type, we have more work to do. 9077% 9078\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9079 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9080 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9081 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9082 \indexnofonts 9083 \turnoffactive 9084 \def\value##1{##1}% 9085 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9086 }% 9087 % 9088 \bgroup 9089 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9090 \egroup 9091 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9092 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9093 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9094 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9095 % 9096 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9097 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9098 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9099 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9100 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9101 % 9102 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9103 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9104 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9105 \else 9106 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9107 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9108 \fi 9109 % 9110 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9111 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9112 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9113 {\safexrefname}}% 9114 \fi 9115} 9116 9117% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9118% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9119% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9120% 9121\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9122\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9123 9124% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9125\def\requireauxfile{% 9126 \iflinks 9127 \tryauxfile 9128 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9129 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9130 \fi 9131 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9132} 9133 9134% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9135% 9136\def\tryauxfile{% 9137 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9138 \ifeof 1 \else 9139 \readdatafile{aux}% 9140 \global\havexrefstrue 9141 \fi 9142 \closein 1 9143} 9144 9145\def\setupdatafile{% 9146 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9147 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9148 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9149 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9150 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9151 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9152 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9153 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9154 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9155 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9156 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9157 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9158 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9159 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9160 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9161 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9162 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9163 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9164 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9165 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9166 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9167 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9168 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9169 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9170 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9171 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9172 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9173 \catcode`\^=\other 9174 % 9175 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9176 \catcode`\~=\other 9177 \catcode`\[=\other 9178 \catcode`\]=\other 9179 \catcode`\"=\other 9180 \catcode`\_=\other 9181 \catcode`\|=\other 9182 \catcode`\<=\other 9183 \catcode`\>=\other 9184 \catcode`\$=\other 9185 \catcode`\#=\other 9186 \catcode`\&=\other 9187 \catcode`\%=\other 9188 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9189 % 9190 \catcode`\\=\active 9191 % 9192 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9193 \catcode`\{=1 9194 \catcode`\}=2 9195 \catcode`\@=0 9196} 9197 9198\def\readdatafile#1{% 9199\begingroup 9200 \setupdatafile 9201 \input\jobname.#1 9202\endgroup} 9203 9204 9205\message{insertions,} 9206% including footnotes. 9207 9208\newcount \footnoteno 9209 9210% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9211% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9212% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9213% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9214% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9215\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9216 9217% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9218\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9219 9220{\catcode `\@=11 9221% 9222% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9223\gdef\footnote{% 9224 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9225 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9226 % 9227 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9228 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9229 \let\@sf\empty 9230 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9231 % 9232 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9233 \unskip 9234 \thisfootno\@sf 9235 \dofootnote 9236}% 9237 9238% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9239% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9240% 9241% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9242% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9243% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9244% 9245\gdef\dofootnote{% 9246 \insert\footins\bgroup 9247 % 9248 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9249 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9250 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9251 % 9252 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9253 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9254 % So reset some parameters. 9255 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9256 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9257 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9258 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9259 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9260 \leftskip\z@skip 9261 \rightskip\z@skip 9262 \spaceskip\z@skip 9263 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9264 \parindent\defaultparindent 9265 % 9266 \smallfonts \rm 9267 % 9268 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9269 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9270 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9271 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9272 \let\noindent = \relax 9273 % 9274 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9275 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9276 \everypar = {\hang}% 9277 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9278 % 9279 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9280 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9281 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9282 \footstrut 9283 % 9284 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9285 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9286} 9287}%end \catcode `\@=11 9288 9289\def\errfootnotenest{% 9290 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9291 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9292 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9293} 9294 9295\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9296 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9297 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9298} 9299 9300% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9301% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9302% would be lost. 9303% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9304% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9305% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9306% 9307% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9308% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9309% out prematurely. 9310% 9311\def\startsavinginserts{% 9312 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9313 \let\insert\saveinsert 9314 \else 9315 \let\checkinserts\relax 9316 \fi 9317} 9318 9319% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9320% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9321% 9322\def\saveinsert#1{% 9323 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9324 \afterassignment\next 9325 % swallow the left brace 9326 \let\temp = 9327} 9328\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9329\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9330 9331\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9332 9333\def\placesaveins#1{% 9334 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9335 {\box#1}% 9336} 9337 9338% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9339{ 9340 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9341 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9342} 9343 9344% initialization: 9345\def\newsaveins #1{% 9346 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9347 \next 9348} 9349\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9350 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9351 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9352 \checksaveins #1}% 9353} 9354 9355% initialize: 9356\let\checkinserts\empty 9357\newsaveins\footins 9358\newsaveins\margin 9359 9360 9361% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9362% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9363% 9364% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9365% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9366% undone and the next image would fail. 9367\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9368\ifeof 1 \else 9369 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9370 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9371 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9372 \input epsf.tex 9373\fi 9374\closein 1 9375% 9376% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9377\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9378\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9379 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9380 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9381% 9382\def\image#1{% 9383 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9384 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9385 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9386 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9387 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9388 \fi 9389 \else 9390 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9391 \fi 9392} 9393% 9394% Arguments to @image: 9395% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9396% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9397% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9398% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9399% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9400\newif\ifimagevmode 9401\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9402 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9403 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9404 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro 9405 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9406 \ifvmode 9407 \imagevmodetrue 9408 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9409 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9410 \imagevmodetrue 9411 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9412 \fi\fi 9413 % 9414 \ifimagevmode 9415 \nobreak\medskip 9416 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9417 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9418 % above and below. 9419 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9420 \nobreak 9421 \fi 9422 % 9423 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9424 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9425 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9426 % normal paragraph indentation. 9427 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9428 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9429 % eradicate the centering. 9430 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 9431 % 9432 % Output the image. 9433 \ifpdf 9434 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9435 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9436 \else 9437 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9438 % For epsf.tex 9439 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9440 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9441 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9442 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9443 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9444 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9445 \else 9446 % For XeTeX 9447 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9448 \fi 9449 \fi 9450 % 9451 \ifimagevmode 9452 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9453 \fi 9454 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9455\endgroup} 9456 9457 9458% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9459% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9460% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9461% 9462\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9463 9464% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9465\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9466 9467% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9468% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9469% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9470% 9471% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9472% be referable. 9473% 9474% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9475% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9476% 9477% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9478% chapter-level command. 9479\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9480% 9481\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9482 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9483 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9484 % 9485 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9486 % 9487 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9488 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9489 % 9490 \startsavinginserts 9491 % 9492 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9493 \par 9494 % 9495 \vtop\bgroup 9496 \def\floattype{#1}% 9497 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9498 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9499 % 9500 \ifx\floattype\empty 9501 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9502 \else 9503 {% 9504 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9505 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9506 \indexnofonts 9507 \turnoffactive 9508 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9509 }% 9510 \fi 9511 % 9512 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9513 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9514 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9515 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9516 % 9517 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9518 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9519 % 9520 {% 9521 % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the 9522 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9523 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9524 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9525 % lists of floats. 9526 % 9527 \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9528 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9529 }% 9530 \fi 9531 % 9532 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9533 \vskip\parskip 9534 % 9535 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9536 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9537} 9538 9539% we have these possibilities: 9540% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9541% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9542% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9543% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9544% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9545% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9546% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9547% @float & no caption: 9548% 9549\def\Efloat{% 9550 \let\floatident = \empty 9551 % 9552 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9553 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9554 % 9555 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9556 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9557 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9558 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9559 \fi 9560 % the number. 9561 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9562 \fi 9563 % 9564 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9565 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9566 \let\captionline = \floatident 9567 % 9568 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9569 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9570 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9571 \fi 9572 % 9573 % caption text. 9574 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9575 \fi 9576 % 9577 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9578 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9579 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9580 \vskip.5\parskip 9581 \captionline 9582 % 9583 % Space below caption. 9584 \vskip\parskip 9585 \fi 9586 % 9587 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9588 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9589 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9590 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9591 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9592 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9593 {% 9594 \requireauxfile 9595 \atdummies 9596 % 9597 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9598 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9599 \else 9600 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9601 \fi 9602 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9603 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9604 }% 9605 \fi 9606 \egroup % end of \vtop 9607 % 9608 \checkinserts 9609} 9610 9611% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9612% 9613\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9614 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9615} 9616 9617% @caption, @shortcaption 9618% 9619\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9620\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9621\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9622\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9623 9624% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9625% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9626\def\getfloatno#1{% 9627 \ifx#1\relax 9628 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9629 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9630 % 9631 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9632 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9633 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9634 \fi 9635 \let\floatno#1% 9636} 9637 9638% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9639% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9640% first read the @float command. 9641% 9642\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9643 9644% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9645% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9646\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9647 9648% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9649% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9650% \currentsection value which we \setref above. 9651% 9652\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9653% 9654% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9655% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9656% 9657\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9658 \def\temp{#1}% 9659 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9660 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9661} 9662 9663% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9664% 9665\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9666 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9667 {% 9668 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9669 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9670 \indexnofonts 9671 \turnoffactive 9672 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9673 }% 9674 % 9675 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9676 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9677 \ifhavexrefs 9678 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9679 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9680 \fi 9681 \else 9682 \begingroup 9683 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9684 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9685 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9686 \endgroup 9687 \fi 9688} 9689 9690% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9691% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9692% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9693% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9694% 9695% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9696% they won't appear in the aux file). 9697% 9698\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9699\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9700 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9701 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9702 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9703 % in pdf output. 9704 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9705 % 9706 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9707 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9708 \writeentry 9709}} 9710 9711 9712\message{localization,} 9713 9714% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9715% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9716% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9717% 9718{ 9719 \catcode`\_ = \active 9720 \globaldefs=1 9721\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9722 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9723 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9724 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9725 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9726 \ifeof 1 9727 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9728 \else 9729 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9730 \input txi-#1.tex 9731 \fi 9732 \closein 1 9733 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9734} 9735% 9736% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9737% try txi-de.tex. 9738% 9739\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9740 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9741 \ifeof 1 9742 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9743 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9744 \else 9745 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9746 \input txi-#1.tex 9747 \fi 9748 \closein 1 9749} 9750}% end of special _ catcode 9751% 9752\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9753is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9754directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9755 9756% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9757% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9758% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9759% 9760% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9761% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9762% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9763% 9764% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9765% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9766% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9767% accented characters problem.) 9768% 9769\catcode`@=11 9770\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9771 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9772 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9773 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9774 \else 9775 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9776 \fi 9777 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9778 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9779 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9780} 9781 9782% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9783% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9784% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9785% 9786\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9787\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9788 9789\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9790 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9791 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9792 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9793 \else 9794 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9795 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9796 \fi 9797\else 9798 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9799 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9800\fi 9801 9802% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9803% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9804% 9805\def\setbytewiseio{% 9806 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9807 \else 9808 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9809 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9810 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9811 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9812 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9813 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9814 \fi 9815 9816 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9817 \else 9818 \directlua{ 9819 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9820 local function convert_char (char) 9821 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9822 end 9823 9824 local function convert_line (line) 9825 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9826 end 9827 9828 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9829 9830 local function convert_line_out (line) 9831 local line_out = "" 9832 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9833 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9834 end 9835 return line_out 9836 end 9837 9838 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9839 } 9840 \fi 9841 9842 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9843} 9844 9845 9846% Helpers for encodings. 9847% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9848% 9849\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9850 \count255=128 9851 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9852 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9853 \advance\count255 by 1 9854 \repeat 9855} 9856 9857\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9858 \count255=128 9859 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9860 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9861 \advance\count255 by 1 9862 \repeat 9863} 9864 9865% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9866% according to the specified encoding. 9867% 9868\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9869\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9870 % 9871 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9872 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9873 % 9874 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9875 % to compare them with \ifx. 9876 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9877 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9878 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9879 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9880 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9881 % 9882 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9883 \asciichardefs 9884 % 9885 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9886 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9887 \setbytewiseio 9888 \fi 9889 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9890 \lattwochardefs 9891 % 9892 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9893 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9894 \setbytewiseio 9895 \fi 9896 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9897 \latonechardefs 9898 % 9899 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9900 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9901 \setbytewiseio 9902 \fi 9903 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9904 \latninechardefs 9905 % 9906 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9907 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9908 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9909 \nativeunicodechardefs 9910 \else 9911 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9912 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9913 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9914 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9915 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9916 % sufficient. 9917 \fi 9918 % 9919 \else 9920 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9921 % 9922 \fi % utfeight 9923 \fi % latnine 9924 \fi % latone 9925 \fi % lattwo 9926 \fi % ascii 9927 % 9928 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9929 \else 9930 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9931 \else 9932 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9933 \else 9934 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 9935 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 9936 \fi 9937 \fi 9938 \fi 9939} 9940 9941% emacs-page 9942% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 9943% the default font encoding (OT1). 9944% 9945\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 9946 9947% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 9948\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 9949 9950% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 9951% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 9952% macros containing the character definitions. 9953\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9954% 9955 9956\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 9957\gdef#1{% 9958 \ifpassthroughchars 9959 \string#1% 9960 \else 9961 #2% 9962 \fi 9963}} 9964 9965% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 9966\def\latonechardefs{% 9967 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 9968 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 9969 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 9970 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 9971 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 9972 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 9973 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 9974 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 9975 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 9976 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 9977 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 9978 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 9979 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 9980 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 9981 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 9982 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 9983 % 9984 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 9985 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 9986 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 9987 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 9988 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 9989 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 9990 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 9991 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 9992 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9993 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 9994 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 9995 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 9996 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 9997 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 9998 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 9999 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 10000 % 10001 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 10002 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10003 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10004 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 10005 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10006 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10007 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10008 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10009 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10010 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10011 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10012 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10013 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10014 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10015 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10016 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10017 % 10018 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10019 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10020 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10021 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10022 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10023 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10024 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10025 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10026 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10027 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10028 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10029 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10030 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10031 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10032 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10033 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10034 % 10035 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10036 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10037 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10038 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10039 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10040 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10041 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10042 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10043 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10044 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10045 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10046 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10047 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10048 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10049 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10050 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10051 % 10052 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10053 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10054 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10055 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10056 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10057 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10058 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10059 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10060 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10061 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10062 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10063 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10064 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10065 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10066 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10067 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10068} 10069 10070% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10071\def\latninechardefs{% 10072 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10073 \latonechardefs 10074 % 10075 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10076 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10077 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10078 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10079 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10080 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10081 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10082 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10083} 10084 10085% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10086\def\lattwochardefs{% 10087 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10088 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10089 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10090 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10091 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10092 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10093 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10094 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10095 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10096 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10097 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10098 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10099 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10100 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10101 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10102 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10103 % 10104 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10105 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10106 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10107 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10108 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10109 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10110 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10111 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10112 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10113 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10114 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10115 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10116 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10117 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10118 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10119 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10120 % 10121 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10122 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10123 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10124 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10125 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10126 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10127 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10128 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10129 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10130 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10131 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10132 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10133 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10134 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10135 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10136 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10137 % 10138 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10139 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10140 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10141 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10142 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10143 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10144 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10145 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10146 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10147 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10148 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10149 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10150 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10151 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10152 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10153 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10154 % 10155 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10156 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10157 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10158 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10159 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10160 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10161 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10162 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10163 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10164 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10165 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10166 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10167 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10168 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10169 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10170 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10171 % 10172 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10173 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10174 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10175 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10176 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10177 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10178 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10179 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10180 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10181 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10182 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10183 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10184 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10185 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10186 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10187 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10188} 10189 10190% UTF-8 character definitions. 10191% 10192% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10193% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10194% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10195% 10196\newcount\countUTFx 10197\newcount\countUTFy 10198\newcount\countUTFz 10199 10200\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10201 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10202% 10203\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10204 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10205% 10206\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10207 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10208 10209\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10210 \ifx #1\relax 10211 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10212 \else 10213 \expandafter #1% 10214 \fi 10215} 10216 10217% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10218\begingroup 10219 \catcode`\~13 10220 \catcode`\$12 10221 \catcode`\"12 10222 10223 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10224 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10225 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10226 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10227 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10228 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10229 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10230 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10231 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10232 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10233 \fi} 10234 10235 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10236 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10237 \countUTFx = "80 10238 \countUTFy = "C2 10239 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10240 \gdef~{% 10241 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10242 \UTFviiiLoop 10243 10244 \countUTFx = "C2 10245 \countUTFy = "E0 10246 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10247 \gdef~{% 10248 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10249 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10250 \UTFviiiLoop 10251 10252 \countUTFx = "E0 10253 \countUTFy = "F0 10254 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10255 \gdef~{% 10256 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10257 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10258 \UTFviiiLoop 10259 10260 \countUTFx = "F0 10261 \countUTFy = "F4 10262 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10263 \gdef~{% 10264 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10265 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10266 }}% 10267 \UTFviiiLoop 10268\endgroup 10269 10270\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10271 10272% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10273\def\U#1{% 10274 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10275 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10276 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10277 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10278 % letters are missing. 10279 \begingroup 10280 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10281 \uppercase{.} 10282 \endgroup 10283 \else 10284 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10285 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10286 \fi 10287 \else 10288 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10289 \fi 10290} 10291 10292% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10293% sequence to be defined. 10294\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10295 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10296\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10297 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10298\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10299 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10300 10301% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10302% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10303% this gets used by the @U command 10304% 10305\begingroup 10306 \catcode`\"=12 10307 \catcode`\<=12 10308 \catcode`\.=12 10309 \catcode`\,=12 10310 \catcode`\;=12 10311 \catcode`\!=12 10312 \catcode`\~=13 10313 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10314 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10315 \begingroup 10316 \parseXMLCharref 10317 10318 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10319 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10320 % 10321 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10322 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10323 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10324 % 10325 \expandafter\expandafter 10326 \expandafter\expandafter 10327 \expandafter\expandafter 10328 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10329 % 10330 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10331 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10332 \fi 10333 % 10334 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10335 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10336 \endgroup} 10337 % 10338 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10339 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10340 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10341 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10342 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10343 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10344 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10345 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10346 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10347 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10348 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10349 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10350 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10351 \else 10352 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10353 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10354 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10355 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10356 \fi\fi\fi 10357 } 10358 10359 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10360 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10361 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10362 % of the bytes. 10363 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10364 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10365 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10366 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10367 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10368 10369 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10370 % in order to get the last five bits. 10371 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10372 10373 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10374 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10375 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10376 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10377 10378 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10379 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10380 % sequence. 10381 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10382 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10383 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10384 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10385 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10386 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10387 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10388 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10389\endgroup 10390 10391% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10392% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10393% 10394\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10395 \catcode"#1=\other 10396} 10397 10398% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10399% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10400% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10401% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10402% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10403% 10404% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10405% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10406% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10407% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10408% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10409% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10410% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10411% 10412\def\unicodechardefs{% 10413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10429 % 10430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10446 % 10447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10463 % 10464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10480 % 10481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10497 % 10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10514 % 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10531 % 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10548 % 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10565 % 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10582 % 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10599 % 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10616 % 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10633 % 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10650 % 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10663 % 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10669 % 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10676 % 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10689 % 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10692 % 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10699 % 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10703 % 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10705 % 10706 % Greek letters upper case 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10724 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10732 % 10733 % Vowels with accents 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10740 % 10741 % Standalone accent 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10743 % 10744 % Greek letters lower case 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10770 % 10771 % More Greek vowels with accents 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10777 % 10778 % Variant Greek letters 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10782 % 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10795 % 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10798 % 10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10807 % 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10820 % 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10831 % 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10842 % 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10853 % 10854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10858 % 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10875 % 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10877 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10878 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10885 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10886 % 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10889 % 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10894 % 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10899 % 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10902 % 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10905 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10906 % 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10909 % 10910 % Punctuation 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10922 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 10926 % 10927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 10928 % 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 10931 % 10932 % Mathematical symbols 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 10938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 10946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 10947 % 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 10951 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 10956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 10978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11039 % 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11069 % 11070 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11072}% end of \unicodechardefs 11073 11074% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11075% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11076\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11077 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11078 \unicodechardefs 11079} 11080 11081% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11082% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11083% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11084% printing the correct glyphs. 11085\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11086\passthroughcharsfalse 11087 11088% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11089% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11090% 11091\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11092 \catcode"#1=\active 11093 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11094 \begingroup 11095 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11096 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11097 \ifpassthroughchars 11098 ##1% 11099 \else 11100 ##3% 11101 \fi 11102 } 11103 \endgroup 11104 } 11105 \begingroup 11106 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11107 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11108 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11109 \endgroup 11110} 11111 11112% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11113% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11114\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11115 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11116 \unicodechardefs 11117} 11118 11119% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11120% make the character token expand 11121% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11122\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11123 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11124 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11125} 11126 11127% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11128\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11129 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11130 \unicodechardefs 11131} 11132 11133% US-ASCII character definitions. 11134\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11135 \relax 11136} 11137 11138% Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default 11139% input encoding and allows @U to work. 11140\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11141 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11142\else 11143 \utfeightchardefs 11144\fi 11145 11146\message{formatting,} 11147 11148\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11149 11150\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11151\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11152\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11153 11154% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11155\vbadness = 10000 11156 11157% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11158\hbadness = 6666 11159 11160% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11161\widowpenalty=10000 11162\clubpenalty=10000 11163 11164% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11165% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11166% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11167% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11168% 11169\def\setemergencystretch{% 11170 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11171 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11172 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11173 \else 11174 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11175 \fi 11176} 11177 11178% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11179% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11180% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11181% 11182% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11183% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11184% 11185\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11186 \voffset = #3\relax 11187 \topskip = #6\relax 11188 \splittopskip = \topskip 11189 % 11190 \vsize = #1\relax 11191 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11192 \outervsize = \vsize 11193 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11194 \txipageheight = \vsize 11195 % 11196 \hsize = #2\relax 11197 \outerhsize = \hsize 11198 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11199 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11200 % 11201 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11202 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11203 % 11204 \ifpdf 11205 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11206 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11207 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11208 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11209 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11210 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11211 \else 11212 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11213 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11214 \else 11215 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11216 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11217 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11218 \fi 11219 \fi 11220 % 11221 \setleading{\textleading} 11222 % 11223 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11224 \setemergencystretch 11225} 11226 11227% @letterpaper (the default). 11228\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11229 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11230 \textleading = 13.2pt 11231 % 11232 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11233 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11234 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11235 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11236 {11in}{8.5in}% 11237}} 11238 11239% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11240\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11241 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11242 \textleading = 12pt 11243 % 11244 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11245 {-.2in}{0in}% 11246 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11247 {9.25in}{7in}% 11248 % 11249 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11250 \tolerance = 700 11251 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11252 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11253}} 11254 11255% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11256% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11257\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11258 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11259 \textleading = 12pt 11260 % 11261 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11262 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11263 {0pt}{14pt}% 11264 {9in}{6in}% 11265 % 11266 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11267 \tolerance = 700 11268 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11269 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11270}} 11271 11272% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11273\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11274 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11275 \textleading = 13.2pt 11276 % 11277 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11278 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11279 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11280 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11281 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11282 % your texinfo source file like this: 11283 % @tex 11284 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11285 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11286 % @end tex 11287 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11288 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11289 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11290 {297mm}{210mm}% 11291 % 11292 \tolerance = 700 11293 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11294 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11295}} 11296 11297% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11298% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11299% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11300\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11301 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11302 \textleading = 12.5pt 11303 % 11304 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11305 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11306 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11307 {210mm}{148mm}% 11308 % 11309 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11310 \tolerance = 800 11311 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11312 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11313 \tableindent = 12mm 11314}} 11315 11316% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11317\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11318 \afourpaper 11319 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11320 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11321 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11322 {297mm}{210mm}% 11323 % 11324 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11325 \globaldefs = 0 11326}} 11327 11328% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11329\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11330 \afourpaper 11331 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11332 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11333 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11334 {297mm}{210mm}% 11335 \globaldefs = 0 11336}} 11337 11338% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11339% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11340% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11341% 11342\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11343\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11344 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11345 \globaldefs = 1 11346 % 11347 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11348 \setleading{\textleading}% 11349 % 11350 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11351 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 11352 \advance\dimen0 by 1in % reference point for DVI is 1 inch from top of page 11353 % 11354 \dimen2 = \hsize 11355 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 11356 \advance\dimen2 by 1in % reference point is 1 inch from left edge of page 11357 % 11358 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11359 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11360 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11361 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11362}} 11363 11364% Set default to letter. 11365% 11366\letterpaper 11367 11368% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11369\hfuzz = 1pt 11370 11371 11372\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11373 11374\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11375 11376% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11377\catcode`\^^? = 14 11378 11379% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11380\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11381\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11382\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11383\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11384\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11385\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11386\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11387\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11388\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11389 11390% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11391% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11392% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11393% 11394% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11395% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11396% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11397% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11398% 11399\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11400 11401% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11402% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11403% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11404% this is not a problem. 11405\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11406 11407% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11408 11409% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11410% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11411% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11412% 11413\catcode`\"=\active 11414\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11415\let"=\activedoublequote 11416\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11417\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11418\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11419 11420\catcode`\_=\active 11421\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11422\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11423\let\realunder=_ 11424 11425\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11426 11427\chardef \less=`\< 11428\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11429\chardef \gtr=`\> 11430\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11431\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11432\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11433\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11434 11435 11436% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11437% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11438\def\texinfochars{% 11439 \let< = \activeless 11440 \let> = \activegtr 11441 \let~ = \activetilde 11442 \let^ = \activehat 11443 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 11444 \let\b = \strong 11445 \let\i = \smartitalic 11446 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11447} 11448 11449% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11450% parsing them. 11451\def\turnoffactive{% 11452 \normalturnoffactive 11453 \otherbackslash 11454} 11455 11456\catcode`\@=0 11457 11458% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11459% as in \char`\\. 11460\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11461 11462% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. 11463{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} 11464 11465% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11466% in fixed width font. 11467\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11468 11469% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11470% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11471% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11472% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11473% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11474% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11475% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11476% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11477 11478@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11479@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11480 11481% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11482% catcode other. 11483@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11484 11485% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11486% the literal character `\'. 11487% 11488{@catcode`- = @active 11489 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11490 @passthroughcharstrue 11491 @let-=@normaldash 11492 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11493 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11494 @let+=@normalplus 11495 @let<=@normalless 11496 @let>=@normalgreater 11497 @let^=@normalcaret 11498 @let_=@normalunderscore 11499 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11500 @let~=@normaltilde 11501 @let\=@ttbackslash 11502 @markupsetuplqdefault 11503 @markupsetuprqdefault 11504 @unsepspaces 11505 } 11506} 11507 11508% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11509% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11510% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11511@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11512 11513% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11514% 11515% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11516% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11517% a backslash. 11518% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11519% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11520% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11521% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11522{ 11523@catcode`@^=7 11524@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11525 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11526 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11527 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11528 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11529 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11530 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11531 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11532 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11533 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11534 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11535}} 11536 11537{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11538@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11539 11540% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11541% appears by mistake. 11542{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11543@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11544 @gdef^^M{% 11545 @par% 11546 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11547}}} 11548 11549 11550@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11551 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11552 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11553 @enableemergencynewline 11554 @let@c=@comment 11555 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11556 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11557 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11558 @catcode`+=@active 11559 @catcode`@_=@active 11560 % 11561 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11562 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11563 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11564 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11565 % file for Texinfo. 11566 % 11567 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11568 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11569 @closein 1 11570} 11571 11572 11573% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11574@escapechar = `@@ 11575 11576% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11577% active definitions as the normal characters. 11578@def@normaldot{.} 11579@def@normalquest{?} 11580@def@normalslash{/} 11581 11582% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11583% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11584@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11585@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11586@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11587 11588@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11589 11590@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11591@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11592@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11593@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11594@catcode`@'=@active 11595@catcode`@`=@active 11596@markupsetuplqdefault 11597@markupsetuprqdefault 11598 11599@c Local variables: 11600@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp) 11601@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11602@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11603@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11604@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11605@c End: 11606 11607@c vim:sw=2: 11608 11609@enablebackslashhack 11610
